12th Physics Exemplar PDF

CK
EXEMPLAR PROBLEMS
IN
PHYSICS
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
CLASS XII
CK
CK
ISBN 978-93-5007-168-7
First Edition
August 2011 Shravana 1933
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system

or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise without the prior permission of the
publisher.
This book is sold subject to the condition that it shall not, by way of trade,
be lent, re-sold, hired out or otherwise disposed of without the publishers
consent, in any form of binding or cover other than that in which it is published.
PD 10T RNB
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
National Council of Educational

Research and Training, 2011
The correct price of this publication is the price printed on this page, Any
revised price indicated by a rubber stamp or by a sticker or by any other
means is incorrect and should be unacceptable.
OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

DEPARTMENT, NCERT
NCERT Campus
Sri Aurobindo Marg
New Delhi 110 016
Phone : 011-26562708
108, 100 Feet Road

Hosdakere Halli Extension
Banashankari III Stage
Bangalore 560 085
` 00.00
Phone : 080-26725740
Navjivan Trust Building

P.O.Navjivan
Ahmedabad 380 014
Phone : 079-27541446
CWC Campus
Opp. Dhankal Bus Stop
Panihati
Kolkata 700 114
Phone : 033-25530454
CWC Complex
Maligaon
Guwahati 781 021
Phone : 0361-2674869
Publication Team
Printed on 80 GSM paper with NCERT

watermark
no
Published at the Publication Department

by the Secretary, National Council of
Educational Research and Training,
Sri Aurobindo Marg, New Delhi 110 016
and printed at Gita Offiset Printers Pvt.
Ltd., C-90, Okhla Industrial Area,
Phase -1, New Delhi 110 020
Head, Publication
Department
: Neerja Shukla
Chief Production
Officer
: Shiv Kumar
Chief Editor
: Shveta Uppal
Chief Business
Manager
: Gautam Ganguly
Assistant Editor
: R.N. Bhardwaj
Assistant Production : Atul Saxena

Officer
Cover Design
Shweta Rao
CK
CK
FOREWORD
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
The National Curriculum Framework (NCF)2005 initiated a new phase of

development of syllabi and textbooks for all stages of school education. Conscious
efforts have been made to discourage rote learning and to diffuse sharp boundaries
between different subject areas. This is well in tune with the National Policy on
Education (NPE)1986 and Learning Without Burden1993 that recommend
child centred system of education. The textbooks for Classes IX and XI were
released in 2006 and for Classes X and XII in 2007. Overall the books have been
well received by students and teachers.
NCF2005 notes that treating the prescribed textbooks as the sole basis of
examination is one of the key reasons why other resources and sites of learning
are ignored. It further reiterates that the methods used for teaching and evaluation
will also determine how effective these textbooks prove for making childrens life
at school a happy experience, rather than source of stress or boredom. It calls for
reform in examination system currently prevailing in the country.
no
The position papers of the National Focus Groups on Teaching of Science,

Teaching of Mathematics and Examination Reform envisage that the physics
question papers, set in annual examinations conducted by the various Boards
do not really assess genuine understanding of the subjects. The quality of
questions papers is often not up to the mark. They usually seek mere information
based on rote memorisation, and fail to test higher-order skills like reasoning
and analysis, let alone lateral thinking, creativity, and judgment.
Good unconventional questions, challenging problems and experiment-based
problems rarely find a place in question papers. In order to address the issue,
and also to provide additional learning material, the Department of Education
in Science and Mathematics (DESM) has made an attempt to develop resource
book of exemplar problems in different subjects at secondary and higher
secondary stages. Each resource book contains different types of questions of
varying difficulty level. Some questions would require the students to apply
simultaneously understanding of more than one chapters/units. These problems
are not meant to serve merely as question bank for examinations but are primarily
meant to improve the quality of teaching/learning process in schools. It is
expected that these problems would encourage teachers to design quality
questions on their own. Students and teachers should always keep in mind that
examination and assessment should test comprehension, information recall,
analytical thinking and problem- solving ability, creativity and speculative ability.
CK
CK
A team of experts and teachers with an understanding of the subject and a proper
role of examinations worked hard to accomplish this task. The material was discussed,
edited, and finally included in this resource book.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) would welcome

suggestions from students, teachers and parents which would help us to further
improve the quality of material in subsequent editions.
Yash Pal
Chairperson
National Steering Committee
New Delhi
21 May 2008
no
Research and Training
iv
CK
CK
PREFACE
The Department of Education in Science and Mathematics (DESM), National
Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT), initiated the development
of Exemplar Problems in science and mathematics for secondary and higher
secondary stages after completing the preparation of textbooks based on National
Curriculum Framework (NCF)2005.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
The main objective of the book on Exemplar Problems in Physics is to provide the
teachers and students a large number of quality problems with varying cognitive levels
to facilitate teaching/learning of concepts in physics that are presented through the
textbook for Class XII. It is envisaged that the problems included in this volume would
help the teachers to design tasks to assess effectiveness of their teaching and to know
about the achievement of their students besides facilitating preparation of balanced
question papers for unit and terminal tests. The feedback based on the analysis of
students responses may help the teachers in further improving the quality of classroom
instructions. In addition, the problems given in this book are also expected to help the
teachers to perceive the basic characteristics of good quality questions and motivate
them to frame similar questions on their own. Students can benefit themselves by
attempting the exercises given in the book for self assessment and also in mastering the
basic techniques of problem solving. Some of the questions given in the book are expected
to challenge the understanding of the concepts of physics of the students and their
ability to applying them in novel situations.
The problems included in this book were prepared through a series of workshops
organised by the DESM for their development and refinement involving practicing
teachers, subject experts from universities and institutes of higher learning, and the
members of the physics group of the DESM whose names appear separately. We gratefully
acknowledge their efforts and thank them for their valuable contribution in our
endeavour to provide good quality instructional material for the school system.
I express my gratitude to Professor Krishna Kumar, Director and Professor
G.Ravindra, Joint Director, NCERT for their valuable motivation and guidiance from
time to time. Special thanks are also due to Dr V.P.Srivastava, Reader, DESM for
coordinating the programme, taking pains in editing and refinement of problems and
for making the manuscript pressworthy.
no
We look forward to feedback from students, teachers and parents for further
improvement of the contents of this book.
Hukum Singh
Professor and Head, DESM
Research and Training
CK
CK
DEVELOPMENT TEAM
MEMBERS
A.W.Joshi, Professor (Rtd), Department of Physics, University of Pune, Pune
Aprajita, PGT (Physics), Kendriya Vidyalaya No.3, Delhi Cantt, New Delhi
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Atul Mody, Lecturer (SG), Department of Physics, VES College of Arts, Science and
Commerce, Chembur, Mumbai
B.K.Sharma, Professor (Rtd), Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,
NCERT, New Delhi
Gagan Gupta, Reader, Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,
NCERT, New Delhi
H.S.Mani, Raja Ramanna Fellow, Institute of Mathematical Sciences, Chennai.

Kiran Nayak, PGT (Physics), Apeejay School, Pitampura, New Delhi
M.A.H.Ahsan, Lecturer, Department of Physics, Jamia Millia Islamia, New Delhi

P. Arun, Reader, SGTB Khalsa College, University of Delhi, Delhi
Pragya Nopany, PGT (Physics), Birla Vidya Niketan, Pushpa Vihar, New Delhi
Pushpa Tyagi, PGT (Physics), Sanskriti School,Chanakya Puri, New Delhi
Ravi Bhattacharjee, Reader, SGTB Khalsa College, University of Delhi, Delhi
R. Joshi, Lecturer (SG), Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

NCERT, New Delhi
S.Rai Choudhury, Raja Ramanna Fellow, Centre for Theoretical Physics, Jamia Millia
Islamia, New Delhi
S.D.Joglekar, Professor, Department of Physics, I.I.T., Kanpur
Shashi Prabha, Lecturer, Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

NCERT, New Delhi
Suchitra Basu Kasturi, PGT (Physics), Sardar Patel Vidyalaya, Lodi Estate, New Delhi
MEMBER-COORDINATOR
no
V.P.Srivastava, Reader, Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

NCERT, New Delhi
CK
CK
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
The National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCER T)

acknowledges the valuable contribution of the individuals and organisations
involved in the development of Exemplar Problems in Physics for Class XII. The
Council also acknowledges the valuable contributions of the following academics
for reviewing and refining the manuscripts of this book: A. A Rangwala, Professor
(Rtd), Department of Physics, University of Mumbai, Mumbai; Girija Shankar,
PGT (Physics), Rajkiya Pratibha Vikas Vidyalaya, Surajmal Vihar, Delhi; Indra
Saini, PGT (Physics), Ramjas School, Pusa Road, New Delhi; Lata Kumari,
PGT (Physics), Chinmaya Vidyalaya, Vasant Vihar, New Delhi; R. S Dass,
Vice-Principal (Rtd), BVB Senior Secondary, School, Lajpat Nagar, New Delhi;
Shirish Pathare, Scientific Officer, D, Homi Bhabha Centre for Science
Education, V.N. Purav Marg, Mumbai; Vandana Grover, PGT (Physics), DAV
Public School, Sector 14, Gurgaon; Vinod Prakash, Professor (Rtd), Department
of Physics, University of Allahabad, Allahabad; and Yashu Kumar, PGT (Physics),
Kulachi Hans Raj Model School, Ashok Vihar, New Delhi. Special thanks are
due to Professor Dipan Ghosh, Department of Physics, IIT, Mumbai for his
continued support to this task; and providing some problems for Chapter VII.
Thanks are due to Hukum Singh, Professor and Head, DESM, NCERT for
his support.
The Council also acknowledges the efforts of Deepak Kapoor, Incharge,
Computer Station; Kamlesh Rao, Ritu Jha and Jitender, DTP Operator.
The contribution of the Publication Department in bringing out this book is
duly acknowledged.
CK
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
no
CK
CK
CK
CONTENTS
FOREWORD
PREFACE
iii
v
CHAPTER ONE
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
CHAPTER TWO
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE
10
CHAPTER THREE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
16
CHAPTER FOUR
MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM
22
CHAPTER FIVE
MAGNETISM AND MATTER
28
CHAPTER SIX
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
33
CHAPTER SEVEN
ALTERNATING CURRENT
40
CHAPTER EIGHT
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
47
CHAPTER NINE
RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
54
CHAPTER TEN
WAVE OPTICS
62
CHAPTER ELEVEN
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER
68
no
CHAPTER TWELVE
ATOMS
75
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
NUCLEI
81
CK
CK
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS: MATERIALS, DEVICES

AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS
87
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
98
106
SAMPLE QUESTION PAPERS
198
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ANSWERS
CK
Chapter One
MCQ I
1.1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ELECTRIC CHARGES
AND FIELDS
In Fig.1.1, two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis,

exert a net electric force in the + x direction on a charge q1 fixed
along the x axis. If a positive charge Q is added at (x, 0),
the force on q1
y
q2
no
q2
q1
Q
q1
(x, 0)
q3
q3
(a)
(b)
Fig. 1.1
Exemplar ProblemsPhysics
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
+q
A point positive charge is brought near an isolated conducting

sphere (Fig. 1.2). The electric field is best given by
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1.2
shall increase along the positive x-axis.

shall decrease along the positive x-axis.
shall point along the negative x-axis.
shall increase but the direction changes because of the
intersection of Q with q2 and q3.
+q
(i)
(ii)
+q
+q
(iv)
(iii)
Fig. 1.2
(a) Fig (i)

(b) Fig (ii)
1.3
(c)
(d)
Fig (iii)
Fig (iv)
The Electric flux through the surface

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
in Fig.1.3 (iv) is the largest.

in Fig. 1.3 (iii) is the least.
in Fig. 1.3 (ii) is same as Fig. 1.3 (iii) but is smaller than Fig. 1.3 (iv)
is the same for all the figures.
S
no
+q
+q
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Fig. 1.3
+q
+q
(iv)
Electric Charges and Fields
1.4
Five charges q1, q2, q3, q4, and q5 are fixed at their positions as shown
in Fig. 1.4. S is a Gaussian surface. The Gausss law is given by
Gaussian Surface
E.ds = 0
q1
1.5
q3
q5
Fig. 1.4
The dipole will not experience any force.

The dipole will experience a force towards right.
The dipole will experience a force towards left.
The dipole will experience a force upwards.
A point charge +q, is placed at a distance d from an

isolated conducting plane. The field at a point P on the
other side of the plane is
(a) directed perpendicular to the plane and away from

the plane.
(b) directed perpendicular to the plane but towards the plane.
(c) directed radially away from the point charge.
(d) directed radially towards the point charge.
+q
Fig. 1.5
A hemisphere is uniformely charged positively. The electric field at

a point on a diameter away from the centre is directed
no
1.7
q4
Figure 1.5 shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is

placed as shown. Which of the following statements is correct?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.6
q2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Which of the following statements is correct?

(a) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from q1, q5 and q3 while q on the RHS will have a contribution
from q2 and q4 only.
(b) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution
(c) E on the LHS of the above equation will have a contribution
from all charges while q on the RHS will have a contribution
from q1, q3 and q5 only.
(d) Both E on the LHS and q on the RHS will have contributions
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
perpendicular to the diameter

parallel to the diameter
at an angle tilted towards the diameter
at an angle tilted away from the diameter.
MCQ II
1.8
If
s E.dS = 0 over a surface, then
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) the electric field inside the surface and on it is zero.

(b) the electric field inside the surface is necessarily uniform.
(c) the number of flux lines entering the surface must be equal to
the number of flux lines leaving it.
(d) all charges must necessarily be outside the surface.
1.9
The Electric field at a point is

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1.10
1.11
no
Q
5Q
R/2
2Q
Fig. 1.6
If there were only one type of charge in the universe, then

(a)
s E.dS 0
on any surface.
(b)
s E.dS = 0
if the charge is outside the surface.
(c)
s E.dS
(d)
s E.dS = 0
could not be defined.

q
if charges of magnitude q were inside the surface.
Consider a region inside which there are various types of charges

but the total charge is zero. At points outside the region
(a) the electric field is necessarily zero.
(b) the electric field is due to the dipole moment of the charge
distribution only.
(c) the dominant electric field is 1 , for large r, where r is the
r3
distance from a origin in this region.
(d) the work done to move a charged particle along a closed path,
away from the region, will be zero.
Gaussian surface
always continuous.
continuous if there is no charge at that point.
discontinuous only if there is a negative charge at that point.
discontinuous if there is a charge at that point..
1.12
Refer to the arrangement of charges in Fig. 1.6 and a Gaussian

surface of radius R with Q at the centre. Then
(a) total flux through the surface of the sphere is Q .
Q
(b) field on the surface of the sphere is 4 R 2 .
0
(c) flux through the surface of sphere due to 5Q is zero.

(d) field on the surface of sphere due to 2Q is same everywhere.
1.13
A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed along a circular

ring of radius R. A small test charge q is placed at the centre of
the ring (Fig. 1.7). Then
VSA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) If q > 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane
of the ring, it will be pushed back towards the centre.
(b) If q < 0 and is displaced away from the centre in the plane
of the ring, it will never return to the centre and will
continue moving till it hits the ring.
(c) If q < 0, it will perform SHM for small displacement along
the axis.
(d) q at the centre of the ring is in an unstable equilibrium
within the plane of the ring for q > 0.
+ +
1.15
A metallic spherical shell has an inner radius R1 and outer radius

R2. A charge Q is placed at the centre of the spherical cavity. What
will be surface charge density on (i) the inner surface, and (ii) the
outer surface?
1.16
The dimensions of an atom are of the order of an Angstrom. Thus

there must be large electric fields between the protons and electrons.
Why, then is the electrostatic field inside a conductor zero?
1.17
If the total charge enclosed by a surface is zero, does it imply that

the elecric field everywhere on the surface is zero? Conversely, if
the electric field everywhere on a surface is zero, does it imply that
net charge inside is zero.
1.18
Sketch the electric field lines for a uniformly charged hollow

cylinder shown in Fig 1.8.
++++
++++
Fig. 1.7
++++++++
++++++++
An arbitrary surface encloses a dipole. What is the electric flux

through this surface?
no
1.14
Fig. 1.8
1.19
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
C
D
A: a corner of the cube.

B: mid-point of an edge of the cube.
C: centre of a face of the cube.
D: mid-point of B and C.
S.A
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
What will be the total flux through the faces of the cube (Fig. 1.9)
with side of length a if a charge q is placed at
1.20
Fig. 1.9
A paisa coin is made up of Al-Mg alloy and weighs 0.75g. It has a

square shape and its diagonal measures 17 mm. It is electrically
neutral and contains equal amounts of positive and negative
charges.
Treating the paisa coins made up of only Al, find the magnitude of
equal number of positive and negative charges. What conclusion
do you draw from this magnitude?
1.21
Consider a coin of Example 1.20. It is electrically neutral and

contains equal amounts of positive and negative charge of
magnitude 34.8 kC. Suppose that these equal charges were
concentrated in two point charges seperated by (i) 1 cm
~ diagonal of the one paisa coin , (ii) 100 m (~ length of a long

2
building), and (iii) 106 m (radius of the earth). Find the force on
each such point charge in each of the three cases. What do you
conclude from these results?
1.22
Fig. 1.10 represents a crystal unit of cesium chloride, CsCl. The

cesium atoms, represented by open circles are situated at the
corners of a cube of side 0.40nm, whereas a Cl atom is situated at
the centre of the cube. The Cs atoms are deficient in one electron
while the Cl atom carries an excess electron.
(i)
no
A (ii)
What is the net electric field on the Cl atom due to eight Cs

atoms?
Suppose that the Cs atom at the corner A is missing. What is
the net force now on the Cl atom due to seven remaining Cs
atoms?
0.40 nm
+
Cs
Cl
Fig. 1.10
1.23
Two charges q and 3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by

distance d. Where should a third charge 2q be placed such that
it will not experience any force?
1.24
Fig. 1.11 shows the electric field lines around three point charges
A, B and C.
B
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 1.11
(a) Which charges are positive?
(b) Which charge has the largest magnitude? Why?
(c) In which region or regions of the picture could the electric field
be zero? Justify your answer.
(i) near A, (ii) near B, (iii) near C, (iv) nowhere.
1.25
Five charges, q each are placed at the corners of a regular pentagon

of side a (Fig. 1.12).
(a) (i)
(ii)
What will be the electric field at O, the centre of the

pentagon?
(b) How would your answer to (a) be affected if pentagon is replaced

by n-sided regular polygon with charge q at each of its corners?
Dq
qC
Fig. 1.12
In 1959 Lyttleton and Bondi suggested that the expansion of the

Universe could be explained if matter carried a net charge.
Suppose that the Universe is made up of hydrogen atoms with a
number density N, which is maintained a constant. Let the charge
on the proton be: ep = (1 + y)e where e is the electronic charge.
no
1.26
What will be the electric field at O if the charge from one of

the corners (say A) is removed?
(iii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is

replaced by q?
LA
Aq
(a) Find the critical value of y such that expansion may start.
(b) Show that the velocity of expansion is proportional to the
distance from the centre.
1.27
Consider a sphere of radius R with charge density distributed as
(r ) = kr for r R
=0
for r > R .
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) Find the electric field at all points r.

(b) Suppose the total charge on the sphere is 2e where e is the
electron charge. Where can two protons be embedded such
that the force on each of them is zero. Assume that the
introduction of the proton does not alter the negative charge
distribution.
1.28
Two fixed, identical conducting plates ( & ) , each of surface

area S are charged to Q and q, respectively, where Q > q > 0. A
third identical plate ( ), free to move is located on the other side of
the plate with charge q at a distance d (Fig 1.13). The third plate
is released and collides with the plate . Assume the collision is
elastic and the time of collision is sufficient to redistribute charge
amongst & .
(a) Find the electric field acting on the plate before collision.
(b) Find the charges on and after the collision.
(c) Find the velocity of the plate after the collision and at a distance
d from the plate .
-Q
Fig. 1.13
1.29
There is another useful system of units, besides the SI/mks A

system, called the cgs (centimeter-gram-second) system. In this
system Coloumbs law is given by
F=
Qq
r
r2
where the distance r is measured in cm (= 102 m), F in dynes

(=105 N) and the charges in electrostatic units (es units), where
no
1es unit of charge =
1
10 9 C
[3]
The number [3] actually arises from the speed of light in vaccum
which is now taken to be exactly given by c = 2.99792458 108
m/s. An approximate value of c then is c = [3] 108 m/s.
(i)
Show that the coloumb law in cgs units yields

1 esu of charge = 1 (dyne)1/2 cm.
Obtain the dimensions of units of charge in terms of mass M,
length L and time T. Show that it is given in terms of fractional
powers of M and L.
(ii)
Write 1 esu of charge = x C, where x is a dimensionless number.

Show that this gives
1
10 9 N.m 2
= 2
4 0
x
C2
1
10 9 , we have
[3]
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
With x =
1
Nm 2
= [3]2 109
4 0
C2
or,
1.30
1
Nm 2
= (2.99792458)2 109
(exactly).
4 0
C2
Two charges q each are fixed separated by distance 2d. A third

charge q of mass m placed at the mid-point is displaced slightly
by x (x<<d) perpendicular to the line joining the two fixed charged
as shown in Fig. 1.14. Show that q will perform simple harmonic q
oscillation of time period.
q x
Fig. 1.14
1/ 2
8 3 0md 3
T =
q2
1.31
Total charge Q is uniformly spread along length of a ring of

radius R. A small test charge +q of mass m is kept at the centre
of the ring and is given a gentle push along the axis of the ring.
(a) Show that the particle executes a simple harmonic oscillation.
no
(b) Obtain its time period.
Chapter Two
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ELECTROSTATIC
POTENTIAL AND
CAPACITANCE
MCQ I
2.1
A capacitor of 4 F is connected as shown in the circuit (Fig. 2.1).

The internal resistance of the battery is 0.5 . The amount of charge
on the capacitor plates will be
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A positively charged particle is released from rest in an uniform

electric field. The electric potential energy of the charge
no
2.2
0
4C
16 C
8C
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
remains a constant because the electric field is uniform.

increases because the charge moves along the electric field.
decreases because the charge moves along the electric field.
decreases because the charge moves opposite to the electric field.
4mF
10W
2.5V
2W
Fig. 2.1
Electrostatic Potential
and Capacitance
2.3
Figure 2.2 shows some equipotential lines distributed in space.

A charged object is moved from point A to point B.
30V
10V
20V
(i)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.4
30V
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
40V
30V 40V
Fig I
50V
10V 20V
50V
Fig II
10V
(ii)
Fig. 2.2
20V
40V
Fig III
50V
(iii)
The work done in Fig. (i) is the greatest.

The work done in Fig. (ii) is least.
The work done is the same in Fig. (i), Fig. (ii) and Fig. (iii).
The work done in Fig. (iii) is greater than Fig. (ii)but equal to
that in Fig. (i).
The electrostatic potential on the surface of a charged conducting

sphere is 100V. Two statments are made in this regard:
S1 : At any point inside the sphere, electric intensity is zero.

S2 : At any point inside the sphere, the electrostatic potential is
100V.
Which of the following is a correct statement?
S1 is true but S2 is false.
Both S1 & S2 are false.
S1 is true, S2 is also true and S1 is the cause of S2.
S1 is true, S2 is also true but the statements are independant.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.5
Equipotentials at a great distance from a collection of charges whose

total sum is not zero are approximately
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
spheres.
planes.
paraboloids
ellipsoids.
11
2.6
d1
k1
d1
k2
A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks in series.

One of the blocks has thickness d1 and dielectric constant k1 and
the other has thickness d2 and dielectric constant k2 as shown in
Fig. 2.3. This arrangement can be thought as a dielectric slab of
thickness d (= d1+d2) and effective dielectric constant k. The k is
k1d1 + k 2d 2
k d + k 2d 2
k k (d + d 2 )
2k1k 2
(b ) 1 1
(c ) 1 2 1
(d )
d1 + d 2
k1 + k 2
(k1d1 + k 2d 2 )
k1 + k 2
(a)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 2.3
MCQ II
2.7
Consider a uniform electric field in the z direction. The potential is

a constant
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.8
in all space.
for any x for a given z.
for any y for a given z.
on the x-y plane for a given z.
Equipotential surfaces
(a) are closer in regions of large electric fields compared to regions

of lower electric fields.
(b) will be more crowded near sharp edges of a conductor.
(c) will be more crowded near regions of large charge densities.
(d) will always be equally spaced.
2.9
The work done to move a charge along an equipotential from A to B

B
(a) cannot be defined as E . d l

A
(b) must be defined as E . d l

A
(c) is zero.
(d) can have a non-zero value.
2.10
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.11
12
In a region of constant potential
the electric field is uniform

the electric field is zero
there can be no charge inside the region.
the electric field shall necessarily change if a charge is placed
outside the region.
In the circuit shown in Fig. 2.4. initially key K1 is closed and key
and Capacitance
K2 is open. Then K1 is opened and K2 is closed (order is important).

[Take Q1 and Q2 as charges on C1 and C2 and V1 and V2 as voltage
respectively.]
K1
K2
()
()
C2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
C1
Then
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.12
charge on C1 gets redistributed such that V1 = V2

charge on C1 gets redistributed such that Q1 = Q2
charge on C1 gets redistributed such that C1V1 + C2V2 = C1 E
charge on C1 gets redistributed such that Q1 + Q2 = Q
If a conductor has a potential V 0 and there are no charges

anywhere else outside, then
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.13
Fig. 2.4
there must be charges on the surface or inside itself.

there cannot be any charge in the body of the conductor.
there must be charges only on the surface.
there must be charges inside the surface.
A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery as shown in

Fig. 2.5. Consider two situations:
no
A: Key K is kept closed and plates of capacitors are moved apart

using insulating handle.
B: Key K is opened and plates of capacitors are moved apart using
insulating handle.
Choose the correct option(s).
(a) In A : Q remains same but C changes.
(b) In B : V remains same but C changes.
(c) In A : V remains same and hence Q changes.
(d) In B : Q remains same and hence V changes.
()
Fig. 2.5
VSA
2.14
Consider two conducting spheres of radii R1 and R2 with R1 > R2. If

the two are at the same potential, the larger sphere has more charge
than the smaller sphere. State whether the charge density of the
13
smaller sphere is more or less than that of the larger one.
Do free electrons travel to region of higher potential or lower
potential?
2.16
Can there be a potential difference between two adjacent

conductors carrying the same charge?
2.17
Can the potential function have a maximum or minimum in free

space?
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2.15
2.18
no
Fig. 2.6
A test charge q is made to move in the electric field of a point charge

Q along two different closed paths (Fig. 2.6). First path has sections
along and perpendicular to lines of electric field. Second path is a
rectangular loop of the same area as the first loop. How does the
work done compare in the two cases?
SA
2.19
Prove that a closed equipotential surface with no charge within

itself must enclose an equipotential volume.
2.20
A capacitor has some dielectric between its plates, and the capacitor
is connected to a DC source. The battery is now disconnected and
then the dielectric is removed. State whether the capacitance, the
energy stored in it, electric field, charge stored and the voltage will
increase, decrease or remain constant.
2.21
Prove that, if an insulated, uncharged conductor is placed near a

charged conductor and no other conductors are present, the
uncharged body must be intermediate in potential between that
of the charged body and that of infinity.
2.22
Calculate potential energy of a point charge q placed along the

axis due to a charge +Q uniformly distributed along a ring of radius
R. Sketch P.E. as a function of axial distance z from the centre of
the ring. Looking at graph, can you see what would happen if -q is
displaced slightly from the centre of the ring (along the axis)?
2.23
Calculate potential on the axis of a ring due to charge Q uniformly

distributed along the ring of radius R.
LA
2.24
14
Find the equation of the equipotentials for an infinite cylinder of

radius r0, carrying charge of linear density .
and Capacitance
Two point charges of magnitude +q and -q are placed at

(-d/2, 0,0) and (d/2, 0,0), respectively. Find the equation of the
equipoential surface where the potential is zero.
2.26
A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose relative

permittivity varies with the applied voltage (U ) as = U where
= 2V1 .A similar capacitor with no dielectric is charged to
U0 = 78 V. It is then connected to the uncharged capacitor with
the dielectric. Find the final voltage on the capacitors.
2.27
A capacitor is made of two circular plates of radius R each,

separated by a distance d<<R. The capacitor is connected to a
constant voltage. A thin conducting disc of radius r<<R and
thickness t<<r is placed at a centre of the bottom plate. Find
the minimum voltage required to lift the disc if the mass of the
disc is m.
2.28
(a) In a quark model of elementary particles, a neutron is made of

one up quarks [charge (2/3) e] and two down quarks [charges
(1/3) e]. Assume that they have a triangle configuration with
side length of the order of 1015 m. Calculate electrostatic
potential energy of neutron and compare it with its mass 939
MeV.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2.25
(b) Repeat above exercise for a proton which is made of two up

and one down quark.
2.29
2.30
Calculate potential on the axis of a disc of

radius R due to a charge Q uniformly distributed on its surface.
no
2.31
Two metal spheres, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R,
both have same surface charge density . They are brought in
contact and separated. What will be new surface charge densities
on them?
C1=6C
In the circuit shown in Fig. 2.7, initially K1
is closed and K2 is open. What are the charges
on each capacitors.
Then K1 was opened and K2 was closed
(order is important), What will be the charge E = 9V
on each capacitor now? [C = 1F]
2.32
Two charges q1 and q2 are placed at (0, 0, d) and (0, 0, d)

respectively. Find locus of points where the potential a zero.
2.33
Two charges q each are separated by distance 2d. A third charge

+ q is kept at mid point O. Find potential energy of + q as a function
of small distance x from O due to q charges. Sketch P.E. v/s x and
convince yourself that the charge at O is in an unstable equilibrium.
K1
C2=3C
K2
C3=3C
Fig. 2.7
15
C2
Chapter Three
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
CURRENT
ELECTRICITY
MCQ I
3.1
Consider a current carrying wire (current I ) in the shape of a circle.

Note that as the current progresses along the wire, the direction of
j (current density) changes in an exact manner, while the current I
remain unaffected. The agent that is essentially responsible for is
no
(a) source of emf.

(b) electric field produced by charges accumulated on the surface
of wire.
(c) the charges just behind a given segment of wire which push
them just the right way by repulsion.
e1
(d) the charges ahead.
3.2
Two batteries of emf 1 and 2 (2 > 1) and internal

resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in parallel
as shown in Fig 3.1.
(a) The equivalent emf eq of the two cells is between 1
and 2, i.e. 1< eq < 2.
16
r1
B
r2
e2
Fig 3.1
Current Electricity
(b) The equivalent emf eq is smaller than 1 .

(c) The eq is given by eq = 1 + 2 always.
(d) eq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2.
A resistance R is to be measured using a meter bridge. Student
chooses the standard resistance S to be 100. He finds the null
point at l1 = 2.9 cm. He is told to attempt to improve the accuracy.
Which of the following is a useful way?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.4
He should measure l1 more accurately.

He should change S to 1000 and repeat the experiment.
He should change S to 3 and repeat the experiment.
He should give up hope of a more accurate measurement with
a meter bridge.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3.3
Two cells of emfs approximately 5V and 10V are to be accurately

compared using a potentiometer of length 400cm.
(a) The battery that runs the potentiometer should have voltage of 8V.
(b) The battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 15V and R
adjusted so that the potential drop across the wire slightly
exceeds 10V.
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should have a potential
drop of 10V.
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances and
not voltages.
3.5
A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular cross-section of

1
cm is connected to a battery across opposite faces. The
2
resistance will be
1cm
1
cm
(a) maximum when the battery is connected across 1 cm
2
faces.
no
(b) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm 1 cm

faces.
1
(c) maximum when the battery is connected across 10 cm
2
cm faces.
(d) same irrespective of the three faces.
3.6
Which of the following characteristics of electrons determines the

current in a conductor?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Drift velocity alone.

Thermal velocity alone.
Both drift velocity and thermal velocity.
Neither drift nor thermal velocity.
17
MCQ II
3.7
Kirchhoff s junction rule is a reflection of
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) conservation of current density vector.

(b) conservation of charge.
(c) the fact that the momentum with which a charged particle
approaches a junction is unchanged (as a vector) as the
charged particle leaves the junction.
(d) the fact that there is no accumulation of charges at a junction.
3.8
R
I
stands for a
variable resistance R . R can vary from R0 to infinity. r is internal

resistance of the battery (r<<R<<R0).
Consider a simple circuit shown in Fig 3.2.
(a) Potential drop across AB is nearly constant as R is varied.

(b) Current through R is nearly a constant as R is varied.
(c) Current I depends sensitively on R .
Fig 3.2
(d) I
3.9
V
always.
r +R
Temperature dependence of resistivity (T) of semiconductors,

insulators and metals is significantly based on the following
factors:
(a) number of charge carriers can change with temperature T.
(b) time interval between two successive collisions can depend
on T.
(c) length of material can be a function of T.
(d) mass of carriers is a function of T.
3.10
The measurement of an unknown resistance R is to be carried

out using Wheatstones bridge (see Fig. 3.25 of NCERT Book).
Two students perform an experiment in two ways. The first
students takes R2 = 10 and R1 = 5. The other student takes R2
= 1000 and R1 = 500. In the standard arm, both take R3 = 5.
no
Both find R =
18
R2
R3 = 10 within errors.
R1
(a) The errors of measurement of the two students are the same.
(b) Errors of measurement do depend on the accuracy with which
R2 and R1 can be measured.
(c) If the student uses large values of R2 and R1, the currents
through the arms will be feeble. This will make determination
of null point accurately more difficult.
(d) Wheatstone bridge is a very accurate instrument and has no
errors of measurement.
Current Electricity
3.11
In a meter bridge the point D is a neutral point

(Fig 3.3).
(a) The meter bridge can have no other neutral
point for this set of resistances.
S
B
l1
100
l1
(b) When the jockey contacts a point on meter wire

left of D, current flows to B from the wire.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(c) When the jockey contacts a point on the meter

wire to the right of D, current flows from B to
the wire through galvanometer.
( )
(d) When R is increased, the neutral point shifts to

left.
VSA
Fig 3.3
Is the motion of a charge across junction momentum conserving?

Why or why not?
3.13
The relaxation time is nearly independent of applied E field

whereas it changes significantly with temperature T. First fact is
(in part) responsible for Ohms law whereas the second fact leads
to variation of with temperature. Elaborate why?
3.14
What are the advantages of the null-point method in a Wheatstone

bridge? What additional measurements would be required to
calculate Runknown by any other method?
3.15
What is the advantage of using thick metallic strips to join wires

in a potentiometer?
3.16
For wiring in the home, one uses Cu wires or Al wires. What

considerations are involved in this?
3.17
Why are alloys used for making standard resistance coils?
3.18
Power P is to be delivered to a device via transmission

cables having resistance RC. If V is the voltage across R
and I the current through it, find the power wasted
and how can it be reduced.
no
3.12
3.19
AB is a potentiometer wire (Fig 3.4). If the value of R is

increased, in which direction will the balance point J
shift?
E
( )
Fig 3.4
19
3.20
While doing an experiment with potentiometer (Fig 3.5) it was

found that the deflection is one sided and (i) the deflection
decreased while moving from one end A of the wire to the end B;
(ii) the deflection increased. while the jockey was moved towards
the end B.
E
( )
(i)
Which terminal +or ve of the cell E1, is connected at

X in case (i) and how is E1 related to E ?
(ii)
Which terminal of the cell E1 is connected at X in case (ii)?
E1
X y
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig 3.5
3.21
A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an

external resistance R. Plot a graph showing the variation of P.D.
across R, verses R.
no
SA
20
3.22
First a set of n equal resistors of R each are connected in series to

a battery of emf E and internal resistance R. A current I is observed
to flow. Then the n resistors are connected in parallel to the same
battery. It is observed that the current is increased 10 times. What
is n?
3.23
Let there be n resistors R1 ............Rn with Rmax = max (R1......... Rn)

and Rmin = min {R1 ..... Rn}. Show that when they are connected in
parallel, the resultant resistance RP< Rmin and when they are
connected in series, the resultant resistance RS > Rmax. Interpret
the result physically.
3.24
The circuit in Fig 3.6 shows two

cells connected in opposition to
each other. Cell E1 is of emf 6V
and internal resistance 2; the
cell E2 is of emf 4V and internal
resistance 8. Find the
potential difference between the
points A and B.
3.25
Two cells of same emf E but

internal resistance r1 and r2 are
connected in series to an
external resistor R (Fig 3.7).
What should be the value of R
so that the potential difference
across the terminals of the first
cell becomes zero.
E1
E2
Fig 3.6
E
B
Fig. 3.7
Current Electricity
Two conductors are made of the same material and have the same
length. Conductor A is a solid wire of diameter 1mm. Conductor B
is a hollow tube of outer diameter 2mm and inner diameter 1mm.
Find the ratio of resistance RA to RB.
3.27
Suppose there is a circuit consisting of only resistances and

batteries. Suppose one is to double (or increase it to n-times) all
voltages and all resistances. Show that currents are unaltered.
Do this for circuit of Example 3.7 in the NCERT Text Book for
Class XII.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3.26
LA
2V
I2
3.28
3.29
Two cells of voltage 10V and 2V and internal resistances 10

and 5 respectively, are connected in parallel with the positive
end of 10V battery connected to negative pole of 2V battery
(Fig 3.8). Find the effective voltage and effective resistance of the
combination.
I1
[cu = 1.7 10
Fig 3.8
E2 E1 1 3
, Al = 2.7 10 m]
8
3.30
In an experiment with a potentiometer, VB = 10V. R is adjusted to

be 50 (Fig. 3.9). A student wanting to measure voltage E1 of a
battery (approx. 8V) finds no null point possible. He then
diminishes R to 10 and is able to locate the null point on the
last (4th) segment of the potentiometer. Find the resistance of the
potentiometer wire and potential drop per unit length across the
wire in the second case.
10W
10V
A room has AC run for 5 hours a day at a voltage of 220V. The

wiring of the room consists of Cu of 1 mm radius and a length of
10 m. Power consumption per day is 10 commercial units. What
fraction of it goes in the joule heating in wires? What would happen
if the wiring is made of aluminium of the same dimensions?
8
m
5W
N1
( ) C
K1
Fig 3.9
no
R = 6W
3.31
(a) Consider circuit in Fig 3.10. How much energy is absorbed

by electrons from the initial state of no current (ignore thermal
motion) to the state of drift velocity?
(b) Electrons give up energy at the rate of RI2 per second to the
thermal energy. What time scale would one associate with
energy in problem (a)? n = no of electron/volume = 1029/m3,
length of circuit = 10 cm, cross-section = A = (1mm)2
I
I
V = 6V
Fig 3.10
21
Chapter Four
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
MOVING CHARGES
AND MAGNETISM
MCQ I
4.1
Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely

.
opposite sense in a uniform magnetic field B = B0 k
(a) They have equal z-components of momenta.

(b) They must have equal charges.
(c) They necessarily represent a particle-antiparticle pair.
no
e e
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy : + = 0 .
m 1 m 2
4.2
Biot-Savart law indicates that the moving electrons (velocity v)

produce a magnetic field B such that
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
B v.
B ||v.
it obeys inverse cube law.
it is along the line joining the electron and point of observation.
Moving Charges and Magnetism
A current carrying circular loop of radius R is placed in the x-y

plane with centre at the origin. Half of the loop with x > 0 is now
bent so that it now lies in the y-z plane.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
4.4
The magnitude of magnetic moment now diminishes.

The magnetic moment does not change.
The magnitude of B at (0.0.z), z >>R increases.
The magnitude of B at (0.0.z), z >>R is unchanged.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4.3
An electron is projected with uniform velocity along the axis of a

current carrying long solenoid. Which of the following is true?
(a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis.

(b) The electron path will be circular about the axis.
(c) The electron will experience a force at 45 to the axis and hence
execute a helical path.
(d) The electron will continue to move with uniform velocity along
the axis of the solenoid.
4.5
In a cyclotron, a charged particle

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
4.6
undergoes acceleration all the time.

speeds up between the dees because of the magnetic field.
speeds up in a dee.
slows down within a dee and speeds up between dees.
A circular current loop of magnetic moment M is in an arbitrary

orientation in an external magnetic field B. The work done to rotate
the loop by 30 about an axis perpendicular to its plane is
(a) MB.
(b)
MB
.
2
MB
.
2
(d) zero.
(c)
no
MCQ II
4.7
The gyro-magnetic ratio of an electron in an H-atom, according to

Bohr model, is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
independent of which orbit it is in.

negative.
positive.
increases with the quantum number n.
23
4.8
Consider a wire carrying a steady current, I placed in a uniform

magnetic field B perpendicular to its length. Consider the charges
inside the wire. It is known that magnetic forces do no work. This
implies that,
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) motion of charges inside the conductor is unaffected by B since

they do not absorb energy.
(b) some charges inside the wire move to the surface as a result
of B.
(c) if the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by
the force.
(d) if the wire moves under the influence of B, no work is done by
the magnetic force on the ions, assumed fixed within the wire.
4.9
Two identical current carrying coaxial loops, carry current I in an

opposite sense. A simple amperian loop passes through both of
them once. Calling the loop as C,
(a)
B.dl = m20 I .
c
(b) the value of
B.dl
is independent of sense of C.
(c) there may be a point on C where B and dl are perpendicular.

(d) B vanishes everywhere on C.
4.10 A cubical region of space is filled with some uniform electric and
magnetic fields. An electron enters the cube across one of its faces
with velocity v and a positron enters via opposite face with velocity
- v. At this instant,
no
(a) the electric forces on both the particles cause identical

accelerations.
(b) the magnetic forces on both the particles cause equal
accelerations.
(c) both particles gain or loose energy at the same rate.
(d) the motion of the centre of mass (CM) is determined by B alone.
4.11 A charged particle would continue to move with a constant velocity

in a region wherein,
(a) E = 0, B 0.
(b) E 0, B 0.
(c) E 0, B = 0.
(d) E = 0, B = 0.
24
VSA
Verify that the cyclotron frequency = eB/m has the correct
dimensions of [T]1.
4.13
Show that a force that does no work must be a velocity dependent

force.
4.14
The magnetic force depends on v which depends on the inertial

frame of reference. Does then the magnetic force differ from inertial
frame to frame? Is it reasonable that the net acceleration has a
different value in different frames of reference?
4.15
Describe the motion of a charged particle in a cyclotron if the

frequency of the radio frequency (rf) field were doubled.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4.12
O2
I2
4.16
Two long wires carrying current I1 and I2 are arranged as shown in

Fig. 4.1. The one carrying current I1 is along is the x-axis. The
other carrying current I2 is along a line parallel to the y-axis given
by x = 0 and z = d. Find the force exerted at O2 because of the wire
along the x-axis.
O1
I1
SA
A current carrying loop consists of 3 identical quarter circles of

radius R, lying in the positive quadrants of the x-y, y-z and z-x
planes with their centres at the origin, joined together. Find the
direction and magnitude of B at the origin.
4.18
A charged particle of charge e and mass m is moving in an electric

field E and magnetic field B. Construct dimensionless quantities
and quantities of dimension [T ]1.
4.19
An electron enters with a velocity v = v0i into a cubical region (faces

parallel to coordinate planes) in which there are uniform electric
and magnetic fields. The orbit of the electron is found to spiral
down inside the cube in plane parallel to the x-y plane. Suggest a
configuration of fields E and B that can lead to it.
no
4.17
Fig. 4.1
4.20
Do magnetic forces obey Newtons third law. Verify for two current
elements dl1 = dl i located at the origin and dl2 = dl j located at
(0, R, 0). Both carry current I.
25
R1 R 2 R 3
4.21
A multirange voltmeter can be constructed by using a

galvanometer circuit as shown in Fig. 4.2. We want to construct
a voltmeter that can measure 2V, 20V and 200V using a
galvanometer of resistance 10 and that produces maximum
deflection for current of 1 mA. Find R1, R2 and R3 that have to be
used.
2V 20V 200V
Fig. 4.2
A long straight wire carrying current of 25A rests on a table as

shown in Fig. 4.3. Another wire PQ of length 1m, mass 2.5 g
carries the same current but in the opposite direction. The wire
PQ is free to slide up and down. To what height will PQ rise?
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4.22
Q
LA
Fig. 4.3
4.23
A 100 turn rectangular coil ABCD (in XY plane) is hung from one
arm of a balance (Fig. 4.4). A mass 500g is added to the other arm
to balance the weight of the coil. A current 4.9 A passes through
the coil and a constant magnetic field of 0.2 T acting inward (in xz
plane) is switched on such that only arm CD of length 1 cm lies in
the field. How much additional mass m must be added to regain
the balance?
4.24
A rectangular conducting loop consists of two wires on two opposite

sides of length l joined together by rods of length d. The wires are
each of the same material but with cross-sections differing by a
factor of 2. The thicker wire has a resistance R and the rods are of
low resistance, which in turn are connected to a constant voltage
source V0. The loop is placed in uniform a magnetic field B at 45
to its plane. Find , the torque exerted by the magnetic field on the
loop about an axis through the centres of rods.
4.25
An electron and a positron are released from (0, 0, 0) and
X X X X XX
XX X XX
Fig. 4.4
no
(0, 0, 1.5R ) respectively, in a uniform magnetic field B = B0 i , each
26
with an equal momentum of magnitude p = e BR. Under what

conditions on the direction of momentum will the orbits be nonintersecting circles?
4.26
A uniform conducting wire of length 12a and resistance R is wound

up as a current carrying coil in the shape of (i) an equilateral
triangle of side a; (ii) a square of sides a and, (iii) a regular hexagon
of sides a. The coil is connected to a voltage source V0. Find the
magnetic moment of the coils in each case.
4.27
Consider a circular current-carrying loop of radius R in the x-y

plane with centre at origin. Consider the line intergral
(L ) =
B.dl
taken along z-axis.
(a) Show that (L) monotonically increases with L.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(b) Use an appropriate Amperian loop to show that ( ) = 0 I ,

where I is the current in the wire.
(c) Verify directly the above result.
(d) Suppose we replace the circular coil by a square coil of sides R
carrying the same current I. What can you say about
S3
( L ) and ( ) ?
4.28
A multirange current meter can be constructed by using a

galvanometer circuit as shown in Fig. 4.5. We want a current meter
that can measure 10mA, 100mA and 1A using a galvanometer of
resistance 10 and that prduces maximum deflection for current
of 1mA. Find S1, S2 and S3 that have to be used
S1
S2
10mA 100mA 1A
Fig. 4.5
4.29
Five long wires A, B, C, D and E, each carrying current I are

arranged to form edges of a pentagonal prism as shown in Fig.
4.6. Each carries current out of the plane of paper.
(a) What will be magnetic induction at a point on the axis O? AxisE

is at a distance R from each wire.
(b) What will be the field if current in one of the wires (say A) is
switched off?
(c) What if current in one of the wire (say) A is reversed?
no
Fig. 4.6
27
Chapter Five
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
MAGNETISM AND
MATTER
MCQ I
5.1
A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and cross-sectional radius a

carries current I. It is placed on a horizontal table taken as
x-y plane. Its magnetic moment m
(a) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by symmetry.
(b) points along the axis of the tortoid ( m = m ).
(c) is zero, otherwise there would be a field falling as
1
at large
r3
no
distances outside the toroid.

(d) is pointing radially outwards.
5.2
The magnetic field of Earth can be modelled by that of a point dipole

placed at the centre of the Earth. The dipole axis makes an angle of
11.3 with the axis of Earth. At Mumbai, declination is nearly zero.
Then,
(a) the declination varies between 11.3 W to 11.3 E.

(b) the least declination is 0.
28
Magnetism and Matter
(c) the plane defined by dipole axis and Earth axis passes through
Greenwich.
(d) declination averaged over Earth must be always negative.
5.3
In a permanent magnet at room temperature
5.4
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) magnetic moment of each molecule is zero.

(b) the individual molecules have non-zero magnetic moment
which are all perfectly aligned.
(c) domains are partially aligned.
(d) domains are all perfectly aligned.
Consider the two idealized systems: (i) a parallel plate capacitor

with large plates and small separation and (ii) a long solenoid of
length L >> R, radius of cross-section. In (i) E is ideally treated as
a constant between plates and zero outside. In (ii) magnetic field is
constant inside the solenoid and zero outside. These idealised
assumptions, however, contradict fundamental laws as below:
(a) case (i) contradicts Gausss law for electrostatic fields.
(b) case (ii) contradicts Gausss law for magnetic fields.
E.dl = 0 .
case (ii) contradicts
H.dl = I en
(c) case (i) agrees with

(d)
5.5
A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of 8 Am1 when

placed in an external magnetic field of 0.6T at a temperature of
4K. When the same sample is placed in an external magnetic field
of 0.2 T at a temperature of 16 K, the magnetisation will be
(a)
32
Am 1
3
(b)
2
Am 1
3
(c) 6 Am 1
(d) 2.4 Am 1 .
no
MCQ II
5.6
S is the surface of a lump of magnetic material.

(a) Lines of B are necessarily continuous across S.
(b) Some lines of B must be discontinuous across S.

(c) Lines of H are necessarily continuous across S.
(d) Lines of H cannot all be continuous across S.
29
5.7
The primary origin(s) of magnetism lies in

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
5.8
atomic currents.
Pauli exclusion principle.
polar nature of molecules.
intrinsic spin of electron.
A long solenoid has 1000 turns per metre and carries a current of
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1 A. It has a soft iron core of r = 1000 . The core is heated beyond

the Curie temperature, Tc.
(a) The H field in the solenoid is (nearly) unchanged but the B field
decreases drastically.
(b) The H and B fields in the solenoid are nearly unchanged.

(c) The magnetisation in the core reverses direction.
(d) The magnetisation in the core diminishes by a factor of
about 10 8.
5.9
Essential difference between electrostatic shielding by a conducting

shell and magnetostatic shielding is due to
(a) electrostatic field lines can end on charges and conductors have
free charges.
(b) lines of B can also end but conductors cannot end them.
(c) lines of B cannot end on any material and perfect shielding is
not possible.
(d) shells of high permeability materials can be used to divert lines
of B from the interior region.
5.10 Let the magnetic field on earth be modelled by that of a point

magnetic dipole at the centre of earth. The angle of dip at a point on
the geographical equator
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
is always zero.
can be zero at specific points.
can be positive or negative.
is bounded.
no
VSA
5.11 A proton has spin and magnetic moment just like an electron. Why
then its effect is neglected in magnetism of materials?
5.12 A permanent magnet in the shape of a thin cylinder of length 10 cm
has M = 106 A/m. Calculate the magnetisation current IM.
5.13 Explain quantitatively the order of magnitude difference between the
diamagnetic susceptibility of N2 (~5 109) (at STP) and Cu (~105).
30
Magnetism and Matter
5.14 From molecular view point, discuss the temperature dependence

of susceptibility for diamagnetism, paramagnetism and
ferromagnetism.
SA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
5.15 A ball of superconducting material is dipped in liquid nitrogen and

placed near a bar magnet. (i) In which direction will it move?
(ii) What will be the direction of its magnetic moment?
5.16 Verify the Gausss law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole
moment m at the origin for the surface which is a sphere of radius R.
5.17 Three identical bar magnets are rivetted together at centre in the
same plane as shown in Fig. 5.1. This system is placed at rest in a
slowly varying magnetic field. It is found that the system of magnets
does not show any motion. The north-south poles of one magnet is
shown in the Fig. 5.1. Determine the poles of the remaining two.
60
60
5.18 Suppose we want to verify the analogy between electrostatic and

magnetostatic by an explicit experiment. Consider the motion of
(i) electric dipole p in an electrostatic field E and (ii) magnetic dipole
m in a magnetic field B. Write down a set of conditions on E, B, p,
m so that the two motions are verified to be identical. (Assume
identical initial conditions.)
Fig. 5.1
5.19 A bar magnet of magnetic moment m and moment of inertia I (about

centre, perpendicular to length) is cut into two equal pieces,
perpendicular to length. Let T be the period of oscillations of the
original magnet about an axis through the mid point, perpendicular
to length, in a magnetic field B. What would be the similar period T
for each piece?
5.20 Use (i) the Amperes law for H and (ii) continuity of lines of B, to
conclude that inside a bar magnet, (a) lines of H run from the N pole
to S pole, while (b) lines of B must run from the S pole to N pole.
no
LA
5.21 Verify the Amperes law for magnetic field of a point dipole of dipole
. Take C as the closed curve running clockwise
moment m = m k
along (i) the z-axis from z = a > 0 to z = R; (ii) along the quarter circle
of radius R and centre at the origin, in the first quadrant of x-z
plane; (iii) along the x-axis from x = R to x = a, and (iv) along the
quarter circle of radius a and centre at the origin in the first quadrant
of x-z plane.
31
5.22 What are the dimensions of , the magnetic susceptibility? Consider
an H-atom. Guess an expression for , upto a constant by
constructing a quantity of dimensions of , out of parameters of
the atom: e, m, v, R and 0 . Here, m is the electronic mass, v is
electronic velocity, R is Bohr radius. Estimate the number so
obtained and compare with the value of ~ 10 5 for many
solid materials.
5.23 Assume the dipole model for earths magnetic field B which is given
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
0 2m cos
4
r3
0 sin m
BH = Horizontal component of magnetic field =
4
r3
by BV = vertical component of magnetic field =
= 90 lattitude as measured from magnetic equator.

Find loci of points for which (i) B is minimum; (ii) dip angle is zero;
and (iii) dip angle is 45.
5.24 Consider the plane S formed by the dipole axis and the axis of earth.
Let P be point on the magnetic equator and in S. Let Q be the point
of intersection of the geographical and magnetic equators. Obtain
the declination and dip angles at P and Q.
no
5.25 There are two current carrying planar coils made each from identical
wires of length L. C1 is circular (radius R ) and C2 is square (side a).
They are so constructed that they have same frequency of oscillation
when they are placed in the same uniform B and carry the same
current. Find a in terms of R.
32
Electromagnetic Induction
Chapter Six
MCQ 1
6.1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ELECTROMAGNETIC
INDUCTION
A square of side L meters lies in the x-y plane in a region, where the
) T, where B is
magnetic field is given by B = Bo (2 i + 3j + 4 k
o
constant. The magnitude of flux passing through the square is
(a) 2 Bo L2 Wb.
(b) 3 Bo L2 Wb.
(c) 4 Bo L2 Wb.
(d) 29 Bo L2 Wb.
A loop, made of straight edges has six corners at A(0,0,0), B(L,O,0)

C(L,L,0), D(0,L,0) E(0,L,L) and F(0,0,L). A magnetic field
) T is present in the region. The flux passing through
B = Bo (i + k
the loop ABCDEFA (in that order) is
no
6.2
(a) Bo L2 Wb.
(b) 2 Bo L2 Wb.
2
(c)
2 Bo L Wb.
(d) 4 Bo L2 Wb.
33
6.3
axis
A
bar
magnet
A cylindrical bar magnet is rotated about its axis (Fig 6.1). A wire is
connected from the axis and is made to touch the cylindrical surface
through a contact. Then
(a) a direct current flows in the ammeter A.
(b) no current flows through the ammeter A.
(c) an alternating sinusoidal current flows through the ammeter A
with a time period T=2/.
(d) a time varying non-sinosoidal current flows through the
ammeter A.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 6.1
6.4
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 6.2
6.5
There are two coils A and B as shown in Fig 6.2. A current starts
flowing in B as shown, when A is moved towards B and stops when
A stops moving. The current in A is counterclockwise. B is kept
stationary when A moves. We can infer that
6.6
no
Same as problem 4 except the coil A is made to rotate about a vertical

axis (Fig 6.3). No current flows in B if A is at rest. The current in coil
A, when the current in B (at t = 0) is counterclockwise and the coil A
is as shown at this instant, t = 0, is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 6.3
there is a constant current in the clockwise direction in A.

there is a varying current in A.
there is no current in A.
there is a constant current in the counterclockwise direction
in A.
constant current clockwise.

varying current clockwise.
varying current counterclockwise.
constant current counterclockwise.
The self inductance L of a solenoid of length l and area of crosssection A, with a fixed number of turns N increases as
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
l and A increase.
l decreases and A increases.
l increases and A decreases.
both l and A decrease.
MCQ II
6.7
A metal plate is getting heated. It can be because

(a) a direct current is passing through the plate.
(b) it is placed in a time varying magnetic field.
34
(c) it is placed in a space varying magnetic field, but does not vary
with time.
(d) a current (either direct or alternating) is passing through the
plate.
An e.m.f is produced in a coil, which is not connected to an external
voltage source. This can be due to
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
6.9
The mutual inductance M12 of coil 1 with respect to coil 2

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
6.10
the coil being in a time varying magnetic field.

the coil moving in a time varying magnetic field.
the coil moving in a constant magnetic field.
the coil is stationary in external spatially varying magnetic field,
which does not change with time.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
6.8
increases when they are brought nearer.

depends on the current passing through the coils.
increases when one of them is rotated about an axis.
is the same as M21 of coil 2 with respect to coil 1.
A circular coil expands radially in a region of magnetic field and

no electromotive force is produced in the coil. This can be because
(a) the magnetic field is constant.

(b) the magnetic field is in the same plane as the circular coil and
it may or may not vary.
(c) the magnetic field has a perpendicular (to the plane of the coil)
component whose magnitude is decreasing suitably.
(d) there is a constant magnetic field in the perpendicular (to the
plane of the coil) direction.
VSA
Consider a magnet surrounded by a wire with an on/off switch S

(Fig 6.4). If the switch is thrown from the off position (open circuit)
to the on position (closed circuit), will a current flow in the circuit?
Explain.
no
6.11
Bar
magnet
Bar
magnet
Circuit open
Circuit closed
Fig. 6.4
35
6.12
A wire in the form of a tightly wound solenoid is connected to a DC

source, and carries a current. If the coil is stretched so that there
are gaps between successive elements of the spiral coil, will the
current increase or decrease? Explain.
6.13
A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows

through it. If an iron core is inserted into the solenoid, will the
current increase or decrease? Explain.
6.14
Consider a metal ring kept on top of a fixed solenoid (say on a

carboard) (Fig 6.5). The centre of the ring coincides with the axis
of the solenoid. If the current is suddenly switched on, the metal
ring jumps up. Explain
6.15
Consider a metal ring kept (supported by a cardboard) on top of a

fixed solenoid carrying a current I (see Fig 6.5). The centre of the
ring coincides with the axis of the solenoid. If the current in the
solenoid is switched off, what will happen to the ring?
6.16
Consider a metallic pipe with an inner radius of 1 cm. If a cylindrical

bar magnet of radius 0.8cm is dropped through the pipe, it takes
more time to come down than it takes for a similar unmagnetised
cylindrical iron bar dropped through the metallic pipe. Explain.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ring
..
..
..
..
.
Fig. 6.5
SA
(0,0,0)
(a,0,0)
6.17
Fig. 6.6
A magnetic field in a certain region is given by B = Bo cos ( t ) k

and a coil of radius a with resistance R is placed in the x-y plane
with its centre at the origin in the magnetic field (see Fig 6.6) . Find
the magnitude and the direction of the current at (a, 0, 0) at
t = /2 , t = / and t = 3 /2 .
S2
6.18
S1
= B1.dA1 + B 2 .dA 2 + ... . Now if we chose two different surfaces

S1 and S2 having C as their edge, would we get the same answer
for flux. Jusity your answer.
no
Fig. 6.7
B D
BC
q
Q
Fig. 6.8
36
Consider a closed loop C in a magnetic field (Fig 6.7). The flux

passing through the loop is defined by choosing a surface whose
edge coincides with the loop and using the formula
6.19
Find the current in the wire for the configuration shown in

Fig 6.8. Wire PQ has negligible resistance. B, the magnetic
field is coming out of the paper. is a fixed angle made by PQ
travelling smoothly over two conducting parallel wires
seperated by a distance d.
A (current vs time) graph of the current passing through a solenoid

is shown in Fig 6.9. For which time is the back electromotive force
(u) a maximum. If the back emf at t = 3s is e, find the back emf at
t = 7 s, 15s and 40s. OA, AB and BC are straight line segments.
2A
A
1A
C
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Current (A)
6.20
10
15
20
25
30
1A
35
40
Time (s)
2A
Fig. 6.9
6.21
LA
6.22
covers a large region where a

A magnetic field B = Bo sin ( t ) k
A
wire AB slides smoothly over two parallel conductors separated C
by a distance d (Fig. 6.10). The wires are in the x-y plane. The wire
AB (of length d) has resistance R and the parallel wires have
negligible resistance. If AB is moving with velocity v, what is the
B
current in the circuit. What is the force needed to keep the wire O
moving at constant velocity?
Fig. 6.10
A conducting wire XY of mass m and neglibile resistance
slides smoothly on two parallel conducting wires as
shown in Fig 6.11. The closed circuit has a resistance R
due to AC. AB and CD are perfect conductors. There is a
.
magnetic field B = B(t )k
no
6.23
There are two coils A and B seperated by some distance. If a current

of 2 A flows through A, a magnetic flux of 10-2 Wb passes through
B (no current through B). If no current passes through A and a
current of 1 A passes through B, what is the flux through A?
(i) Write down equation for the acceleration of the wire

XY.
B
C
(ii) If B is independent of time, obtain v(t) , assuming v

(0) = u0.
(iii) For (b), show that the decrease in kinetic energy of XY equals
the heat lost in R.
Y
x (t)
x
D
Fig. 6.11
37
6.24
l
l
2l
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 6.12
6.25
Consider an infinitely long wire carrying a current I (t ), with
dI
= = constant. Find the current produced in the rectangular
dt
loop of wire ABCD if its resistance is R (Fig. 6.13).
l
dr
xo
I (t)
Fig. 6.13
6.26
A rectangular loop of wire ABCD is kept close to an infinitely long

wire carrying a current I (t ) = I o (1 t / T ) for 0 t T and
I (0) = 0 for t > T (Fig. 6.14). Find the total charge passing through
a given point in the loop, in time T. The resistance of the loop is R.
A
L1
L2 + x
I (t)
Fig. 6.14
no
ODBAC is a fixed rectangular conductor of negilible resistance

(CO is not connnected) and OP is a conductor which rotates
clockwise with an angular velocity (Fig 6.12). The entire system
is in a uniform magnetic field B whose direction is along the normal
to the surface of the rectangular conductor ABDC. The conductor
OP is in electric contact with ABDC. The rotating conductor has a
resistance of per unit length. Find the current in the rotating
conductor, as it rotates by 180.
38
Q.27 A magnetic field B is confined to a region r a and points out of

the paper (the z-axis), r = 0 being the centre of the circular region.
A charged ring (charge = Q) of radius b, b > a and mass m lies in
the x-y plane with its centre at the origin. The ring is free to rotate
and is at rest. The magnetic field is brought to zero in time t.
Find the angular velocity of the ring after the field vanishes.
6.29
6.30
A rod of mass m and resistance R slides smoothly over two parallel

perfectly conducting wires kept sloping at an angle with respect
to the horizontal (Fig. 6.15). The circuit is closed through a perfect
conductor at the top. There is a constant magnetic field B along
the vertical direction. If the rod is initially at rest, find the velocity
of the rod as a function of time.
B
q
Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the

arrangement shown in Fig 6.16. B is constant and is out of the
X
S
paper. Parallel wires have no resistance. v is constant. Switch S
is closed at time t = 0.
C
Fig. 6.15
A
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
6.28
Find the current in the sliding rod AB (resistance = R) for the

arrangement shown in Fig 6.17. B is constant and is out of the
paper. Parallel wires have no resistance. v is constant. Switch S is
closed at time t = 0.
X
B
B
Fig. 6.16
B
v d
B
Fig. 6.17
A metallic ring of mass m and radius l (ring being horizontal) is

falling under gravity in a region having a magnetic field. If z is the
vertical direction, the z-component of magnetic field is Bz = Bo
(1+ z). If R is the resistance of the ring and if the ring falls with a
velocity v, find the energy lost in the resistance. If the ring has
reached a constant velocity, use the conservation of energy to
determine v in terms of m, B, and acceleration due to gravity g.
6.32
A long solenoid S has n turns per meter, with diameter a. At the

centre of this coil we place a smaller coil of N turns and diameter
b (where b < a). If the current in the solenoid increases linearly,
with time, what is the induced emf appearing in the smaller coil.
Plot graph showing nature of variation in emf, if current varies as
a function of mt2 + C.
no
6.31
39
Chapter Seven
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ALTERNATING
CURRENT
MCQ 1
If the rms current in a 50 Hz ac circuit is 5 A, the value of the

current 1/300 seconds after its value becomes zero is
(a) 5 2 A
(b) 5 3 / 2 A
(c) 5/6 A
(d) 5 / 2 A
7.2
An alternating current generator has an internal resistance Rg

and an internal reactance Xg. It is used to supply power to a
passive load consisting of a resistance Rg and a reactance XL. For
maximum power to be delivered from the generator to the load,
the value of XL is equal to
(a) zero.
(b) Xg.
(c) Xg.
(d) Rg.
no
7.1
Alternating Current
7.3
When a voltage measuring device is connected to AC mains, the

meter shows the steady input voltage of 220V. This means
(a) input voltage cannot be AC voltage, but a DC voltage.
(b) maximum input voltage is 220V.
(c) the meter reads not v but <v2> and is calibrated to read
< v2 > .
7.4
To reduce the reasonant frequency in an LCR series circuit with a

generator
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
7.5
R = 20 , L = 1.5 H, C = 35F.
R = 25 , L = 2.5 H, C = 45F.
R = 15 , L = 3.5 H, C = 30F.
R = 25 , L = 1.5 H, C = 45F.
An inductor of reactance 1 and a resistor of 2 are connected in

series to the terminals of a 6 V (rms) a.c. source. The power dissipated
in the circuit is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8 W.
12 W.
14.4 W.
18 W.
The output of a step-down transformer is measured to be 24 V

when connected to a 12 watt light bulb. The value of the peak
current is
(a) 1/ 2 A.
(b) 2 A.
(c) 2 A.
no
7.7
the generator frequency should be reduced.

another capacitor should be added in parallel to the first.
the iron core of the inductor should be removed.
dielectric in the capacitor should be removed.
Which of the following combinations should be selected for better

tuning of an LCR circuit used for communication?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
7.6
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(d) the pointer of the meter is stuck by some mechanical defect.
(d) 2 2 A.
41
MCQ II
7.8 As the frequency of an ac circuit increases, the current first increases
and then decreases. What combination of circuit elements is most
likely to comprise the circuit?
Inductor and capacitor.
Resistor and inductor.
Resistor and capacitor.
Resistor, inductor and capacitor.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
7.9 In an alternating current circuit consisting of elements in series,

the current increases on increasing the frequency of supply. Which
of the following elements are likely to constitute the circuit ?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Only resistor.
Resistor and an inductor.
Resistor and a capacitor.
Only a capacitor.
7.10 Electrical energy is transmitted over large distances at high

alternating voltages. Which of the following statements is (are)
correct?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
For a given power level, there is a lower current.

Lower current implies less power loss.
Transmission lines can be made thinner.
It is easy to reduce the voltage at the receiving end using
step-down transformers.
no
7.11 For an LCR circuit, the power transferred from the driving source
to the driven oscillator is P = I2Z cos .
42
(a) Here, the power factor cos 0, P 0.

(b) The driving force can give no energy to the oscillator (P = 0) in
some cases.
(c) The driving force cannot syphon out (P < 0) the energy out of
oscillator.
(d) The driving force can take away energy out of the oscillator.
7.12 When an AC voltage of 220 V is applied to the capacitor C

(a) the maximum voltage between plates is 220 V.
(b) the current is in phase with the applied voltage.
(c) the charge on the plates is in phase with the applied voltage.
(d) power delivered to the capacitor is zero.
Alternating Current
7.13 The line that draws power supply to your house from street has
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
zero average current.

220 V average voltage.
voltage and current out of phase by 90.
voltage and current possibly differing in phase such that
VSA
7.14
7.15
7.16
.
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
<
If a LC circuit is considered analogous to a harmonically oscillating

spring block system, which energy of the LC circuit would be
analogous to potential energy and which one analogous to kinetic
energy?
Draw the effective equivalent circuit of the circuit shown in
Fig 7.1, at very high frequencies and find the effective impedance.
Study the circuits (a) and (b) shown in Fig 7.2 and answer the
following questions.
R C
R1
L2
C1
L1
R2
C2
R3
Fig. 7.1
~
(b)
~
(a)
Fig. 7.2
(a) Under which conditions would the rms currents in the two
circuits be the same?
(b) Can the rms current in circuit (b) be larger than that in (a)?
Can the instantaneous power output of an ac source ever be

negative? Can the average power output be negative?
7.18
In series LCR circuit, the plot of Imax vs is shown in Fig 7.3. Find
the bandwidth and mark in the figure.
no
7.17
Im (A)
1.0
0.5
0
.5
1.0 1.5 2.0

w(rad/s)
Fig. 7.3
43
The alternating current in a circuit is described by the graph
shown in Fig 7.4 . Show rms current in this graph.
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
2T
t
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
I (A)
7.19
Fig. 7.4
7.20
How does the sign of the phase angle , by which the supply
voltage leads the current in an LCR series circuit, change as the
supply frequency is gradually increased from very low to very
high values.
SA
7.21
A device X is connected to an a.c source. The variation of voltage,

current and power in one complete cycle is shown in Fig 7.5.
(a) Which curve shows power consumption over a full cycle?
(b) What is the average power consumption over a cycle?
(c) Identify the device X.
A
v, i, P
no
Fig. 7.5
44
7.22
Both alternating current and direct current are measured in

amperes. But how is the ampere defined for an alternating
current?
7.23
A coil of 0.01 henry inductance and 1 ohm resistance is connected

to 200 volt, 50 Hz ac supply. Find the impedance of the circuit
and time lag between max. alternating voltage and current.
7.24
A 60 W load is connected to the secondary of a transformer whose

primary draws line voltage. If a current of 0.54 A flows in the
Alternating Current
load, what is the current in the primary coil? Comment on the

type of transformer being used.
7.25
Explain why the reactance provided by a capacitor to an

alternating current decreases with increasing frequency.
7.26
Explain why the reactance offered by an inductor increases with

increasing frequency of an alternating voltage.
7.27
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
LA
An electrical device draws 2kW power from AC mains (voltage

223V (rms) = 50,000 V). The current differs (lags) in phase by
tan =
3 as compared to voltage. Find (i) R, (ii) X X , and

C
L
(iii) IM. Another device has twice the values for R, XC and XL. How
are the answers affected?
7.28
1MW power is to be delivered from a power station to a town

10 km away. One uses a pair of Cu wires of radius 0.5 cm for this
purpose. Calculate the fraction of ohmic losses to power
transmitted if
(i) power is transmitted at 220V. Comment on the feasibility of
doing this.
(ii) a step-up transformer is used to boost the voltage to

11000 V, power transmitted, then a step-down transfomer is
used to bring voltage to 220 V.
(Cu = 1.7 10 8 SI unit)

7.29
Consider the LCR circuit shown in Fig 7.6. Find the net
no
v
current i and the phase of i. Show that i = . Find the
Z
impedence Z for this circuit.
7.30
For an LCR circuit driven at frequency , the equation reads

L
i1
i2
vm sin wt
Fig. 7.6
di
q
+ Ri + = vi = vm sin t
dt
C
(i) Multiply the equation by i and simplify where possible.

(ii) Interpret each term physically.
45
(iii) Cast the equation in the form of a conservation of energy
statement.
(iv) Intergrate the equation over one cycle to find that the phase
difference between v and i must be acute.
7.31
In the LCR circuit shown in Fig 7.7, the ac driving voltage is

v = vm sin t.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(i) Write down the equation of motion for q (t).
(ii) At t = t0, the voltage source stops and R is short circuited. Now
write down how much energy is stored in each of L and C.
(iii) Describe subsequent motion of charges.
no
Fig. 7.7
46
Chapter Eight
MCQ I
8.1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ELECTROMAGNETIC
WAVES
One requires 11eV of energy to dissociate a carbon monoxide

molecule into carbon and oxygen atoms. The minimum frequency
of the appropriate electromagnetic radiation to achieve the
dissociation lies in
visible region.
infrared region.
ultraviolet region.
microwave region.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8.2
linearly polarized electromagnetic wave given as

E = E o i cos (kz t ) is incident normally on a perfectly reflecting
infinite wall at z = a. Assuming that the material of the wall is optically
inactive, the reflected wave will be given as
(a) Er = E o i cos (kz t ) .
(b) Er = E o i cos (kz + t ) .
(c) Er = E o i cos (kz + t ) .
(d) E = E i sin (kz t ) .
r
8.3
Light with an energy flux of 20 W/cm2 falls on a non-reflecting

surface at normal incidence. If the surface has an area of 30 cm2.
the total momentum delivered (for complete absorption) during
30 minutes is
36 105 kg m/s.
36 104 kg m/s.
108 104 kg m/s.
1.08 107 kg m/s.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8.4
The electric field intensity produced by the radiations coming from

100 W bulb at a 3 m distance is E. The electric field intensity
produced by the radiations coming from 50 W bulb at the same
distance is
(a) E .
2
(b) 2E.
8.5
(c)
E
.
2
(d)
2E .
If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors of the

electromagnetic wave, the direction of propagation of electromagnetic
wave is along
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
no
8.6
The ratio of contributions made by the electric field and magnetic

field components to the intensity of an EM wave is
(a) c : 1
(b) c2 : 1
(c) 1 : 1
(d)
8.7
48
E.
B.
B E.
E B.
c :1
An EM wave radiates outwards from a dipole antenna, with E0 as

the amplitude of its electric field vector. The electric field E0 which
Electromagnetic Waves
transports significant energy from the source falls off as
MCQ II
8.8
An
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1
(a) r 3
1
(b) 2
r
1
(c)
r
(d) remains constant.
electromognetic
wave
travels
in
vacuum
along
z direction: E = ( E1i + E 2 j ) cos (kz t ) . Choose the correct options

from the following:
(a) The
associated
magnetic
field
is
given
as
1
( E i E 2 j ) cos (kz-t).
c 1
(b) The
associated
magnetic
field
is
given
as
B=
1
( E i E2 j ) cos (kz-t).
c 1
(c) The given electromagnetic field is circularly polarised.
(d) The given electromagnetic wave is plane polarised.
B=
8.9
An electromagnetic wave travelling along z-axis is given as:

E = E 0 cos (kz - t.). Choose the correct options from the following;
1
1
k E = (k
E) .
c
(b) The electromagnetic field can be written in terms of the
(a) The associated magnetic field is given as B =

).
associated magnetic field as E = c ( B k
. E = 0, k
. B=0.
(c) k
no
E = 0, k
B=0.
(d) k
8.10
A plane electromagnetic wave propagating along x direction can

have the following pairs of E and B
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Ex, By.
Ey, Bz.
Bx, Ey.
Ez, By.
49
8.11
A charged particle oscillates about its mean equilibrium position

with a frequency of 109 Hz. The electromagnetic waves produced:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The source of electromagnetic waves can be a charge
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
8.12
will have frequency of 109 Hz.

will have frequency of 2 109 Hz.
will have a wavelength of 0.3 m.
fall in the region of radiowaves.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
8.13
moving with a constant velocity.

moving in a circular orbit.
at rest.
falling in an electric field.
An EM wave of intensity I falls on a surface kept in vacuum and

exerts radiation pressure p on it. Which of the following are true?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(b)
Radiation pressure is I/c if the wave is totally absorbed.

Radiation pressure is I/c if the wave is totally reflected.
Radiation pressure is 2I/c if the wave is totally reflected.
Radiation pressure is in the range I/c < p < 2I/c for real surfaces.
no
VSA
50
8.14
Why is the orientation of the portable radio with respect to

broadcasting station important?
8.15
Why does microwave oven heats up a food item containing water

molecules most efficiently?
8.16
The charge on a parallel plate capacitor varies as q = q0 cos 2t.

The plates are very large and close together (area = A,
separation = d). Neglecting the edge effects, find the displacement
current through the capacitor?
8.17
A variable frequency a.c source is connected to a capacitor. How

will the displacement current change with decrease in frequency?
8.18
The magnetic field of a beam emerging from a filter facing a

floodlight is given by
B0 = 12 108 sin (1.20 107 z 3.60 1015 t) T.
What is the average intensity of the beam?
8.19
Poynting vectors S is defined as a vector whose magnitude is equal

to the wave intensity and whose direction is along the direction of
1
wave propogation. Mathematically, it is given by S =
EB.
0
Show the nature of S vs t graph.
8.20
Professor C.V Raman surprised his students by suspending freely

a tiny light ball in a transparent vacuum chamber by shining a
laser beam on it. Which property of EM waves was he exhibiting?
Give one more example of this property.
SA
8.21
Show that the magnetic field B at a point in between the plates of
8.22
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
a parallel-plate capacitor during charging is 0 r dE (symbols

2 dt
having usual meaning).
Electromagnetic waves with wavelength
(i) 1 is used in satellite communication.
(ii) 2 is used to kill germs in water purifies.
(iii) 3 is used to detect leakage of oil in underground pipelines.
(iv) 4 is used to improve visibility in runways during fog and mist

conditions.
(a) Identify and name the part of electromagnetic spectrum to

which these radiations belong.
(b) Arrange these wavelengths in ascending order of their
magnitude.
(c) Write one more application of each.
8.23
Show that average value of radiant flux density S over a single

period T is given by S =
You are given a 2F parallel plate capacitor. How would you

establish an instantaneous displacement current of 1mA in the
space between its plates?
no
8.24
1
E 02 .
2c0
8.25
Show that the radiation pressure exerted by an EM wave of

intensity I on a surface kept in vacuum is I/c.
8.26
What happens to the intensity of light from a bulb if the

distance from the bulb is doubled? As a laser beam travels across
the length of a room, its intensity essentially remains constant.
51
What geomatrical characteristic of LASER beam is responsible for
the constant intensity which is missing in the case of light from
the bulb?
8.27
Even though an electric field E exerts a force qE on a charged

particle yet the electric field of an EM wave does not contribute to
the radiation pressure (but transfers energy). Explain.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
LA
8.28
An infinitely long thin wire carrying a uniform linear static charge

density is placed along the z-axis (Fig. 8.1). The wire is set into
. Calculate
motion along its length with a uniform velocity v = v k
z
Fig. 8.1
the poynting vector S =
1
(E B).
o
8.29
Sea water at frequency = 4 108 Hz has permittivity 80 o,

permeability o and resistivity = 0.25 m. Imagine a parallel
plate capacitor immersed in sea water and driven by an alternating
voltage source V(t) = Vo sin (2 t). What fraction of the conduction
current density is the displacement current density?
8.30
A long straight cable of length l is placed symmetrically along

z-axis and has radius a(<<l). The cable consists of a thin wire and
a co-axial conducting tube. An alternating current I(t) = Io sin (2t)
flows down the central thin wire and returns along the co-axial
conducting tube. The induced electric field at a distance s from
s
the wire inside the cable is E (s,t ) = o I o cos (2t ) In k.
a
no
(i) Calculate the displacement current density inside the cable.

(ii) Integrate the displacement current density across the crosssection of the cable to find the total displacement current Id.
(iii) Compare the conduction current I0 with the dispalcement
current I od .
8.31
A plane EM wave travelling in vacuum along z direction is given

by E = E 0 sin(kz t )i and B = B0 sin(kz t )j .
(i) Evaluate
Fig 8.2.
(ii) Evaluate
52
E.dl
B.ds
over the rectangular loop 1234 shown in
over the surface bounded by loop 1234.
E0
dB
to prove B = c .
dt
0
(iv) By using similar process and the equation
(iii) Use equation
d
B.dl = 0 I + 0 dtE , prove that c =
0 0
A plane EM wave travelling along z direction is described

by E = E 0 sin(kz t )i and B = B0 sin(kz t )j . Show
that
(i)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
8.32
E.dl =
The average energy density of the wave is given by
u av =
Fig. 8.2
1
1 B20
0 E 02 +
.
4
4 0
(ii) The time averaged intensity of the wave is given by

1
c 0 E 02 .
2
no
I av =
53
Chapter Nine
MCQ I
9.1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
RAY OPTICS AND

OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
A ray of light incident at an angle on a refracting face of a prism

emerges from the other face normally. If the angle of the prism is 5
and the prism is made of a material of refractive index 1.5, the angle
of incidence is
7.5.
5.
15.
2.5.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.2
A short pulse of white light is incident from air to a glass slab at

normal incidence. After travelling through the slab, the first colour
to emerge is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
blue.
green.
violet.
red.
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
An object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens

with a uniform speed 5 m/s and stops at the focus. The image
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.4
A passenger in an aeroplane shall

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.5
moves away from the lens with an uniform speed 5 m/s.

moves away from the lens with an uniform accleration.
moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
moves towards the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
9.3
never see a rainbow.

may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric circles.
may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric arcs.
shall never see a secondary rainbow.
You are given four sources of light each one providing a light of a
single colour red, blue, green and yellow. Suppose the angle of
refraction for a beam of yellow light corresponding to a particular
angle of incidence at the interface of two media is 90. Which of the
following statements is correct if the source of yellow light is replaced
with that of other lights without changing the angle of incidence?
(a) The beam of red light would undergo total internal reflection.
(b) The beam of red light would bend towards normal while it gets
refracted through the second medium.
(c) The beam of blue light would undergo total internal reflection.
(d) The beam of green light would bend away from the normal as it
gets refracted through the second medium.
9.6
The radius of curvature of the curved surface of a plano-convex

lens is 20 cm. If the refractive index of the material of the lens be
1.5, it will
no
(a) act as a convex lens only for the objects that lie on its curved
side.
(b) act as a concave lens for the objects that lie on its curved side.
(c) act as a convex lens irrespective of the side on which the object
lies.
(d) act as a concave lens irrespective of side on which the object lies.
9.7
The phenomena involved in the reflection of radiowaves by

ionosphere is similar to
(a) reflection of light by a plane mirror.
(b) total internal reflection of light in air during a mirage.
(c) dispersion of light by water molecules during the formation of a
rainbow.
(d) scattering of light by the particles of air.
55
1
9.8
Q
1
2
3
4
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
The direction of ray of light incident on a concave mirror is shown

by PQ while directions in which the ray would travel after reflection
is shown by four rays marked 1, 2, 3 and 4
(Fig 9.1). Which of the four rays correctly shows the direction of
reflected ray?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.9
Fig. 9.1
The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of water while

its mass density is lower. Fig 9.2. shows a layer of turpentine
floating over water in a container. For which one of the four rays
incident on turpentine in Fig 9.2, the path shown is correct?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
1
2
3
4
Air
Turpentine
Water
Fig. 9.2
no
9.10
56
A car is moving with at a constant speed of 60 km h1 on a straight

road. Looking at the rear view mirror, the driver finds that the car
following him is at a distance of 100 m and is approaching with a
speed of 5 km h 1. In order to keep track of the car in the rear, the
driver begins to glance alternatively at the rear and side mirror of
his car after every 2 s till the other car overtakes. If the two cars
were maintaining their speeds, which of the following statement
(s) is/are correct?
(a) The speed of the car in the rear is 65 km h1.

(b) In the side mirror the car in the rear would appear to approach
with a speed of 5 km h1 to the driver of the leading car.
(c) In the rear view mirror the speed of the approaching car would
appear to decrease as the distance between the cars decreases.
(d) In the side mirror, the speed of the approaching car would
appear to increase as the distance between the cars decreases.
9.11
There are certain material developed in laboratories which have a

negative refractive index (Fig. 9.3). A ray incident from air (medium 1)
into such a medium (medium 2) shall follow a path given by
i
1
r
(b)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
i r
(c)
(d)
Fig. 9.3
MCQ II
9.12
Consider an extended object immersed in water contained in a

plane trough. When seen from close to the edge of the trough the
object looks distorted because
(a) the apparent depth of the points close to the edge are nearer
the surface of the water compared to the points away from the
edge.
(b) the angle subtended by the image of the object at the eye is
smaller than the actual angle subtended by the object in air.
(c) some of the points of the object far away from the edge may
not be visible because of total internal reflection.
(d) water in a trough acts as a lens and magnifies the object.
9.13
A rectangular block of glass ABCD has a refractive index 1.6.

A pin is placed midway on the face AB (Fig. 9.4). When observed
from the face AD, the pin shall
appear to be near A.
appear to be near D.
appear to be at the centre of AD.
not be seen at all.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.14
Fig. 9.4
Between the primary and secondary rainbows, there is a dark

band known as Alexandars dark band. This is because
(a) light scattered into this region interfere destructively.
(b) there is no light scattered into this region.
57
(c) light is absorbed in this region.
(d) angle made at the eye by the scattered rays with respect to the
incident light of the sun lies between approximately 42 and
50.
9.15
A magnifying glass is used, as the object to be viewed can be

brought closer to the eye than the normal near point. This
results in
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) a larger angle to be subtended by the object at the eye and

hence viewed in greater detail.
(b) the formation of a virtual erect image.
(c) increase in the field of view.
(d) infinite magnification at the near point.
9.16
An astronomical refractive telescope has an objective of focal length

20m and an eyepiece of focal length 2cm.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
The length of the telescope tube is 20.02m.

The magnification is 1000.
The image formed is inverted.
An objective of a larger aperture will increase the brightness
and reduce chromatic aberration of the image.
VSA
Will the focal length of a lens for red light be more, same or less
than that for blue light?
9.18
The near vision of an average person is 25cm. To view an object

with an angular magnification of 10, what should be the power of
the microscope?
9.19
An unsymmetrical double convex thin lens forms the image of a

point object on its axis. Will the position of the image change if
the lens is reversed?
9.20
Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 > d3 and refractive

indices 1 > 2 > 3 are put in a beaker. The height of each liquid
no
9.17
column is
normal vision, find the apparent depth of the dot.

9.21
58
h
. A dot is made at the bottom of the beaker. For near
3
For a glass prism ( = 3 ) the angle of minimum deviation is

equal to the angle of the prism. Find the angle of the prism.
SA
A short object of length L is placed along the principal axis of a
concave mirror away from focus. The object distance is u. If the
mirror has a focal length f, what will be the length of the image?
You may take L <<|v - f|.
9.23
A circular disc of radius R is placed co-axially and horizontally

inside an opaque hemispherical bowl of radius a (Fig. 9.5). The
far edge of the disc is just visible when viewed from the edge of the
bowl. The bowl is filled with transparent liquid of refractive index
and the near edge of the disc becomes just visible. How far below
the top of the bowl is the disc placed?
9.24
A thin convex lens of focal length 25 cm is cut into two pieces

0.5 cm above the principal axis. The top part is placed at (0,0) and
an object placed at (50 cm, 0). Find the coordinates of the image.
9.25
In many experimental set-ups the source and screen are fixed at

a distance say D and the lens is movable. Show that there are two
positions for the lens for which an image is formed on the screen.
Find the distance between these points and the ratio of the image
sizes for these two points.
9.26
A jar of height h is filled with a transparent liquid of refractive

index (Fig. 9.6). At the centre of the jar on the bottom surface is
a dot. Find the minimum diameter of a disc, such that when placed
on the top surface symmetrically about the centre, the dot is
invisible.
90
-a
Fig. 9.5
no
h
i i
Fig. 9.6
9.27
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
9.22
A myopic adult has a far point at 0.1 m. His power of accomodation

is 4 diopters. (i) What power lenses are required to see distant
59
objects? (ii) What is his near point without glasses? (iii) What is
his near point with glasses? (Take the image distance from the
lens of the eye to the retina to be 2 cm.)
LA
Show that for a material with refractive index 2 , light incident
at any angle shall be guided along a length perpendicular to the
incident face.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
9.28
9.29
The mixture a pure liquid and a solution in a long vertical column

(i.e, horizontal dimensions << vertical dimensions) produces
diffusion of solute particles and hence a refractive index gradient
along the vertical dimension. A ray of light entering the column at
right angles to the vertical is deviated from its original path. Find
the deviation in travelling a horizontal distance d << h, the height
of the column.
9.30
If light passes near a massive object, the gravitational interaction

causes a bending of the ray. This can be thought of as happening
due to a change in the effective refrative index of the medium
given by
n(r) = 1 + 2 GM/rc2
where r is the distance of the point of consideration from the centre

of the mass of the massive body, G is the universal gravitational
constant, M the mass of the body and c the speed of light in
vacuum. Considering a spherical object find the deviation of the
ray from the original path as it grazes the object.
9.31
qi
R
qr
no
qi
An infinitely long cylinder of radius R is made of an unusual exotic

material with refractive index 1 (Fig. 9.7). The cylinder is placed
between two planes whose normals are along the y direction. The
center of the cylinder O lies along the y-axis. A narrow laser beam
is directed along the y direction from the lower plate. The laser
source is at a horizontal distance x from the diameter in the
y direction. Find the range of x such that light emitted from the
lower plane does not reach the upper plane.
Fig. 9.7
9.32
(i) Consider a thin lens placed between a source (S) and an

observer (O) (Fig. 9.8). Let the thickness of the lens vary as
w(b ) = w0
b2
, where b is the verticle distance from the pole.
w0 is a constant. Using Fermats principle i.e. the time of transit
60
for a ray between the source and observer is an

extremum, find the condition that all paraxial rays
starting from the source will converge at a point O
on the axis. Find the focal length.
P1
b
S
(ii) A gravitational lens may be assumed to have a varying

width of the form
Fig. 9.8
bmin < b < bmax
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
k
w(b ) = k1ln 2
b
k
= k1ln 2
b min
b < bmin
Show that an observer will see an image of a point object as a

ring about the center of the lens with an angular radius
u +v
u
v .
no
(n 1) k1
61
Chapter Ten
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
WAVE OPTICS
MCQ I
10.1
Consider a light beam incident from air to a glass slab at Brewsters

angle as shown in Fig. 10.1.
A polaroid is placed in the path of the emergent ray at point P
and rotated about an axis passing through the centre
and perpendicular to the plane of the polaroid.
no
(a) For a particular orientation there shall be darkness

as observed through the polaoid.
(b) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid
shall be independent of the rotation.
(c) The intensity of light as seen through the Polaroid
shall go through a minimum but not zero for two
orientations of the polaroid.
(d) The intensity of light as seen through the polaroid shall
go through a minimum for four orientations of the
polaroid.
10.2
Consider sunlight incident on a slit of width 104 A. The image

seen through the slit shall
Fig. 10.1
Wave Optics
(a) be a fine sharp slit white in colour at the center.

(b) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to zero intensities at
the edges.
(c) a bright slit white at the center diffusing to regions of different
colours.
(d) only be a diffused slit white in colour.
Consider a ray of light incident from air onto a slab of glass
(refractive index n) of width d, at an angle . The phase difference
between the ray reflected by the top surface of the glass and the
bottom surface is
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
10.3
1/2
(a)
4 d
2
1 2 sin
n
(b)
4 d
2
1 2 sin
n
(c)
4d
1
2
1 2 sin

n
(d)
4 d
1
2
1 2 sin

n
1/ 2
1/2
1/2
10.4
+ 2 .
In a Youngs double slit experiment, the source is white light. One

of the holes is covered by a red filter and another by a blue filter.
In this case
(a) there shall be alternate interference patterns of red and blue.

(b) there shall be an interference pattern for red distinct from that
for blue.
(c) there shall be no interference fringes.
(d) there shall be an interference pattern for red mixing with one
for blue.
Figure 10.2 shows a standard two slit
arrangement with slits S1, S2. P1, P2 are the two
minima points on either side of P (Fig. 10.2).
no
10.5
At P2 on the screen, there is a hole and behind P2

is a second 2- slit arrangement with slits S3, S4
and a second screen behind them.
(a) There would be no interference pattern on the
second screen but it would be lighted.
(b) The second screen would be totally dark.
Screen
S1
P1
S
P
P2
S2
S3
S4
Second
Screen
Fig. 10.2
63
(c) There would be a single bright point on the second screen.
(d) There would be a regular two slit pattern on the second screen.
MCQ II
10.6
S1
x
S2
Two source S1 and S2 of intensity I1 and I2 are placed in front of a

screen [Fig. 10.3 (a)]. The patteren of intensity distribution seen
in the central portion is given by Fig. 10.3 (b).
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
In this case which of the following statements are true.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 10.3 (a)
10.7
x=0
Consider sunlight incident on a pinhole of width 103A. The image

of the pinhole seen on a screen shall be
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Fig. 10.3 (b)
10.8
no
the size decreases.

the intensity increases.
the size increases.
the intensity decreases.
For light diverging from a point source

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
64
a sharp white ring.

different from a geometrical image.
a diffused central spot, white in colour.
diffused coloured region around a sharp central white spot.
Consider the diffraction patern for a small pinhole. As the size of

the hole is increased
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
10.9
S1 and S2 have the same intensities.

S1 and S2 have a constant phase difference.
S1 and S2 have the same phase.
S1 and S2 have the same wavelength.
the wavefront is spherical.

the intensity decreases in proportion to the distance squared.
the wavefront is parabolic.
the intensity at the wavefront does not depend on the distance.
VSA
10.10
Is Huygens principle valid for longitudunal sound waves?
10.11
Consider a point at the focal point of a convergent lens. Another

convergent lens of short focal length is placed on the other side.
What is the nature of the wavefronts emerging from the final image?
10.12
What is the shape of the wavefront on earth for sunlight?
Wave Optics
10.13
Why is the diffraction of sound waves more evident in daily

experience than that of light wave?
10.14
The human eye has an approximate angular resolution of
= 5.8 10 4 rad and a typical photoprinter prints a minimum
10.15
SA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
of 300 dpi (dots per inch, 1 inch = 2.54 cm). At what minimal
distance z should a printed page be held so that one does not see
the individual dots.
A polariod (I) is placed in front of a monochromatic source.
Another polatiod (II) is placed in front of this polaroid (I) and
rotated till no light passes. A third polaroid (III) is now placed in
between (I) and (II). In this case, will light emerge from (II). Explain.
10.16
Can reflection result in plane polarised light if the light is incident

on the interface from the side with higher refractive index?
10.17
For the same objective, find the ratio of the least separation
between two points to be distinguished by a microscope for light
o
of 5000 A and electrons accelerated through 100V used as the

illuminating substance.
10.18
Consider a two slit interference arrangements (Fig. 10.4) such

that the distance of the screen from the slits is half the distance
between the slits. Obtain the value of D in terms of such
that the first minima on the screen falls at a distance D from the
centre O.
S1
Source
S
T1
P
O
no
S2
OP = x
CO = D
S1C = CS2 = D
T2
Screen
Fig. 10.4
LA
10.19
Figure 10.5 shown a two slit arrangement with a source which

emits unpolarised light. P is a polariser with axis whose direction
is not given. If I0 is the intensity of the principal maxima when no
polariser is present, calculate in the present case, the intensity of
the principal maxima as well as of the first minima.
S1
1
S
2
P
S2
Fig. 10.5
65
S1
P1
A
10.20
L=
C
d/
S2
Screen
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 10.6
AC = CO = D, S1C = S2C = d << D
A small transparent slab containing material of = 1.5 is placed

along AS2 (Fig.10.6). What will be the distance from O of the
principal maxima and of the first minima on either side of the
principal maxima obtained in the absence of the glass slab. .
10.21
Four identical monochromatic sources A,B,C,D as shown in the

(Fig.10.7) produce waves of the same wavelength and are
coherent. Two receiver R1 and R2 are at great but equal distaces
from B.
(i) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal?

(ii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when B
is turned off?
(iii) Which of the two receivers picks up the larger signal when D
is turned off?
(iv) Which of the two receivers can distinguish which of the sources
B or D has been turned off?
no
R2
l/2
R1
R1B = d = R2B
AB = BC = BD = /2
l/2
B
l/2
D
Fig. 10.7
66
Wave Optics
10.22 The optical properties of a medium are governed by the relative

permitivity (r ) and relative permeability (r ). The refractive index
is defined as
r r = n. For ordinary material r > 0 and r > 0 and
the positive sign is taken for the square root. In 1964, a Russian
scientist V. Veselago postulated the existence of material with r
< 0 and r < 0. Since then such metamaterials have been
produced in the laboratories and their optical properties studied.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
For such materials n = r r . As light enters a medium of such

refractive index the phases travel away from the direction of
propagation.
(i) According to the description above show that if rays of light

enter such a medium from air (refractive index =1) at an angle
in 2nd quadrant, them the refracted beam is in the 3rd quadrant.
(ii) Prove that Snells law holds for such a medium.
no
10.23 To ensure almost 100 per cent transmittivity, photographic lenses

are often coated with a thin layer of dielectric material. The refractive
index of this material is intermediated between that of air and glass
(which makes the optical element of the lens). A typically used
dielectric film is MgF2 (n = 1.38). What should the thickness of the
o
film be so that at the center of the visible speetrum (5500 A ) there
is maximum transmission.
67
Chapter Eleven
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
DUAL NATURE OF
RADIATION AND
MATTER
MCQ I
11.1
A particle is dropped from a height H. The de Broglie wavelength

of the particle as a function of height is proportional to
(a) H
(b) H 1/2
(c) H0
(b) H 1/2
The wavelength of a photon needed to remove a proton from a

nucleus which is bound to the nucleus with 1 MeV energy is nearly
no
11.2
(a) 1.2 nm
(b) 1.2 103 nm
(c) 1.2 106 nm
(d) 1.2 101 nm
11.3
Consider a beam of electrons (each electron with energy E0) incident

on a metal surface kept in an evacuated chamber. Then
Dual Nature of Radiation

and Matter
(a) no electrons will be emitted as only photons can emit electrons.

(b) electrons can be emitted but all with an energy, E0.
(c) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of
E0 ( is the work function).
(d) electrons can be emitted with any energy, with a maximum of
E0.
Consider Fig. 11.7 in the NCERT text book of physics for Class
XII. Suppose the voltage applied to A is increased. The diffracted
beam will have the maximum at a value of that
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.4
(a) will be larger than the earlier value.

(b) will be the same as the earlier value.
(c) will be less than the earlier value.
(d) will depend on the target.
11.5
A proton, a neutron, an electron and an -particle have same

energy. Then their de Broglie wavelengths compare as
(a) p = n > e >
(b) < p = n > e
(c) e < p = n >
(d) e = p = n =
11.6
An electron is moving with an initial velocity v = v 0 i and is in a

magnetic field B = B j . Then its de Broglie wavelength
0
(a) remains constant.

(b) increases with time.
(c) decreases with time.
(d) increases and decreases periodically.
11.7
An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0i (v 0 > 0) is in

an electric field E = E i(E = constant > 0 ) . Its de Broglie
0
wavelength at time t is given by
no
(a)
eE 0 t
1 + m v
0
eE 0t
(b) 0 1 + mv
0
(c) 0
(d) 0t.
69
11.8
An electron (mass m) with an initial velocity v = v 0 i is in an

electric field E = E 0 j . If 0 = h/mv0, its de Breoglie wavelength at
time t is given by
(a) 0
(b) 0 1 +
e 2 E 02t 2
m 2v 02
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(c)
1+
e 2 E 02t 2
m 2v 02
(d)
e 2 E 02t 2
+
1
m 2v 02
MCQ II
11.9
Relativistic corrections become neccssary when the expression

1
2
for the kinetic energy mv , becomes comparable with mc2,
2
where m is the mass of the particle. At what de Broglie wavelength
will relativistic corrections become important for an electron?
(a) =10nm
(b) =101nm
(c) =104nm
(d) =106nm
no
11.10
Two particles A1 sand A2 of masses m1, m2 (m1 > m2) have the same
de Broglie wavelength. Then
(a) their momenta are the same.
(b) their energies are the same.
(c) energy of A1 is less than the energy of A2.
(d) energy of A1 is more than the energy of A2.
11.11
The de Broglie wavelength of a photon is twice the de Broglie

wavelength of an electron. The speed of the electron is ve =
Then
70
c
.
100

and Matter
Ee
4
(a) E = 10
p
Ee
2
(b) E = 10
p
pe
2
(c) m c = 10
e
11.12
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
pe
4
(d) m c = 10 .
e
Photons absorbed in matter are converted to heat. A source

emitting n photon/sec of frequency is used to convert 1kg of
ice at 0C to water at 0C. Then, the time T taken for the
conversion
(a) decreases with increasing n, with fixed.
(b) decreases with n fixed, increasing
(c) remains constant with n and changing such that
n = constant.
(d) increases when the product n increases.
11.13
A particle moves in a closed orbit around the origin, due to a

force which is directed towards the origin. The de Broglie
wavelength of the particle varies cyclically between two values 1,
2 with 1>2. Which of the following statement are true?
(a) The particle could be moving in a circular orbit with origin as
centre
(b) The particle could be moving in an elliptic orbit with origin as

its focus.
(c) When the de Broglie wave length is 1, the particle is nearer

the origin than when its value is 2.
no
(d) When the de Broglic wavelength is 2, the particle is nearer

the origin than when its value is 1.
VSA
11.14
A proton and an -particle are accelerated, using the same

potential difference. How are the deBroglie wavelengths p and
a related to each other?
11.15
(i) In the explanation of photo electric effect, we asssume one

photon of frequency collides with an electron and transfers
71
its energy. This leads to the equation for the maximum energy
Emax of the emitted electron as
Emax = h 0
where 0 is the work function of the metal. If an electron
absorbs 2 photons (each of frequency ) what will be the
maximum energy for the emitted electron?
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii) Why is this fact (two photon absorption) not taken into
consideration in our discussion of the stopping potential?
11.16
There are materials which absorb photons of shorter wavelength

and emit photons of longer wavelength. Can there be stable
substances which absorb photons of larger wavelength and emit
light of shorter wavelength.
11.17
Do all the electrons that absorb a photon come out as

photoelectrons?
11.18
There are two sources of light, each emitting with a power of

100 W. One emits X-rays of wavelength 1nm and the other visible
light at 500 nm. Find the ratio of number of photons of X-rays to
the photons of visible light of the given wavelength?
electron
SA
11.19
How would you reconcile with momentum-conservation? Note

light (photons) have momentum in a different direction than the
emitted electrons.
light
metal
11.20
Consider a metal exposed to light of wavelength 600 nm. The

maximum energy of the electron doubles when light of
wavelength 400 snm is used. Find the work function in eV.
11.21
Assuming an electron is confined to a 1nm wide region , find the

uncertainty in momentum using Heisenberg Uncertainty
principle (Ref Eq 11.12 of NCERT Textbook). You can assume
no
Fig. 11.1
the uncertainty in position x as 1nm. Assuming p p , find

the energy of the electron in electron volts.
11.22
72
Consider Fig.11.1 for photoemission.
Two monochromatic beams A and B of equal intensity I, hit a

screen. The number of photons hitting the screen by beam A is

and Matter
twice that by beam B. Then what inference can you make about
their frequencies?
Two particles A and B of de Broglie wavelengths 1 and 2 combine
to form a particle C. The process conserves momentum. Find the
de Broglie wavelength of the particle C. (The motion is one
dimensional).
11.24
A neutron beam of energy E scatters from atoms on a surface

with a spacing d = 0.1nm. The first maximum of intensity in the
reflected beam occurs at = 30. What is the kinetic energy E of
the beam in eV?
LA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.23
11.25
Consider a thin target (102m square, 103m thickness) of sodium,

which produces a photocurrent of 100A when a light of intensity
100W/m2 ( = 660nm) falls on it. Find the probability that a
photoelectron is produced when a photons strikes a sodium
atom. [Take density of Na = 0.97 kg/m3].
11.26
Consider an electron in front of metallic surface at a distance d

(treated as an infinite plane surface). Assume the force of attraction
1 q2
by the plate is given as
4 4 0d 2
Calculate work in taking the charge to an infinite distance from

the plate. Taking d = 0.1nm, find the work done in electron volts.
[Such a force law is not valid for d < 0.1nm].
11.27
A student performs an experiment on photoelectric

effect, using two materials A and B. A plot of Vstop vs
is given in Fig. 11.2.
no
(i) Which material A or B has a higher work

function?
(ii) Given the electric charge of an electron
= 1.6 1019 C, find the value of h obtained from
the experiment for both A and B.
Comment on whether it is consistent with
Einsteins theory:
Vstop
(V)
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
14
14
14
5 10 10 10 15 10
Frequency (Hz)
Fig. 11.2
11.28
A particle A with a mass mA is moving with a velocity v and hits

a particle B (mass mB) at rest (one dimensional motion). Find the
73
change in the de Broglic wavelength of the particle A. Treat the
collision as elastic.
Consider a 20 W bulb emitting light of wavelength 5000 A and

shining on a metal surface kept at a distance 2m. Assume that
the metal surface has work function of 2 eV and that each atom
on the metal surface can be treated as a circular disk of radius
1.5 A .
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.29
(i) Estimate no. of photons emitted by the bulb per second.

[Assume no other losses]
(ii) Will there be photoelectric emission?
(iii) How much time would be required by the atomc disk to receive
energy equal to work function (2 eV)?
(iv) How many photons would atomic disk receive within time
duration calculated in (iii) above?
(v) Can you explain how photoelectric effect was observed
instantaneously?
no
[Hint: Time calculated in part (iii) is from classical consideration

and you may further take the target of surface area say 1cm2
and estimate what would happen?]
74
Atoms
Chapter Twelve
MCQ I
12.1
Taking the Bohr radius as a0 = 53pm, the radius of Li++ ion in its
ground state, on the basis of Bohrs model, will be about
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
53
27
18
13
pm
pm
pm
pm
The binding energy of a H-atom, considering an electron moving

me 4
around a fixed nuclei (proton), is B =
. (m = electron
8n 2 02h 2
mass).
no
12.2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ATOMS
If one decides to work in a frame of reference where the electron is

at rest, the proton would be moving arround it. By similar
arguments, the binding energy would be
B=
Me 4
(M = proton mass)
8n 2 02h 2
75
This last expression is not correct because
(a) n would not be integral.
(b) Bohr-quantisation applies only to electron
(c) the frame in which the electron is at rest is not inertial.
(d) the motion of the proton would not be in circular orbits, even
approximately.
The simple Bohr model cannot be directly applied to calculate the
energy levels of an atom with many electrons. This is because
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
12.3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12.4
of the electrons not being subject to a central force.

of the electrons colliding with each other
of screening effects
the force between the nucleus and an electron will no longer
be given by Coulombs law.
For the ground state, the electron in the H-atom has an angular
momentum = h , according to the simple Bohr model. Angular
momentum is a vector and hence there will be infinitely many
orbits with the vector pointing in all possible directions. In
actuality, this is not true,
(a) because Bohr model gives incorrect values of angular

momentum.
(b) because only one of these would have a minimum energy.
(c) angular momentum must be in the direction of spin of electron.
(d) because electrons go around only in horizontal orbits.
12.5
O2 molecule consists of two oxygen atoms. In the molecule, nuclear

force between the nuclei of the two atoms
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12.6
Two H atoms in the ground state collide inelastically. The

maximum amount by which their combined kinetic energy is
reduced is
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12.7
is not important because nuclear forces are short-ranged.

is as important as electrostatic force for binding the two atoms.
cancels the repulsive electrostatic force between the nuclei.
is not important because oxygen nucleus have equal number
of neutrons and protons.
10.20 eV
20.40 eV
13.6 eV
27.2 eV
A set of atoms in an excited state decays.

(a) in general to any of the states with lower energy.
(b) into a lower state only when excited by an external electric
field.
76
Atoms
(c) all together simultaneously into a lower state.

(d) to emit photons only when they collide.
MCQ II
An ionised H-molecule consists of an electron and two protons.
The protons are separated by a small distance of the order of
angstrom. In the ground state,
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12.9
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
12.8
the electron would not move in circular orbits.

the energy would be (2)4 times that of a H-atom.
the electrons, orbit would go arround the protons.
the molecule will soon decay in a proton and a H-atom.
Consider aiming a beam of free electrons towards free protons.

When they scatter, an electron and a proton cannot combine to
produce a H-atom,
(a) because of energy conservation.
(b) without simultaneously releasing energy in the from of
radiation.
(c) because of momentum conservation.
(d) because of angular momentum conservation.
12.10
The Bohr model for the spectra of a H-atom

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12.11
will not be applicable to hydrogen in the molecular from.

will not be applicable as it is for a He-atom.
is valid only at room temperature.
predicts continuous as well as discrete spectral lines.
The Balmer series for the H-atom can be observed
no
(a) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted when an excited

atom falls to the ground state.
(b) if we measure the frequencies of light emitted due to
transitions between excited states and the first excited state.
(c) in any transition in a H-atom.
(d) as a sequence of frequencies with the higher frequencies
getting closely packed.
1 me 4
be the energy of the nth level of H-atom. If all
8 02 n 2h 2
the H-atoms are in the ground state and radiation of frequency
(E2-E1)/h falls on it,
12.12 Let En =
(a) it will not be absorbed at all
77
(b) some of atoms will move to the first excited state.
(c) all atoms will be excited to the n = 2 state.
(d) no atoms will make a transition to the n = 3 state.
12.13
The simple Bohr modle is not applicable to He4 atom because

He4 is an inert gas.
He4 has neutrons in the nucleus.
He4 has one more electron.
electrons are not subject to central forces.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
VSA
12.14
The mass of a H-atom is less than the sum of the masses of a

proton and electron. Why is this?
12.15
Imagine removing one electron from He and He . Their energy

levels, as worked out on the basis of Bohr model will be very
close. Explain why.
12.16
When an electron falls from a higher energy to a lower energy

level, the difference in the energies appears in the form of
electromagnetic radiation. Why cannot it be emitted as other
forms of energy?
12.17
Would the Bohr formula for the H-atom remain unchanged if
proton had a charge (+4/3)e and electron a charge ( 3 / 4 ) e ,

where e = 1.6 1019C. Give reasons for your answer.
12.18
Consider two different hydrogen atoms. The electron in each atom

is in an excited state. Is it possible for the electrons to have
different energies but the same orbital angular momentum
according to the Bohr model?
SA
Positronium is just like a H-atom with the proton replaced by

the positively charged anti-particle of the electron (called the
positron which is as massive as the electron). What would be the
ground state energy of positronium?
12.20
Assume that there is no repulsive force between the electrons in

an atom but the force between positive and negative charges is
given by Coulombs law as usual. Under such circumstances,
calculate the ground state energy of a He-atom.
no
12.19
78
Atoms
12.21
Using Bohr model, calculate the electric current created by the

electron when the H-atom is in the ground state.
12.22
Show that the first few frequencies of light that is emitted when
electrons fall to the nth level from levels higher than n, are
approximate harmonics (i.e. in the ratio 1 : 2: 3...) when n >>1.
12.23
What is the minimum energy that must be given to a H atom in
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ground state so that it can emit an H line in Balmer series. If the

angular momentum of the system is conserved, what would be
the angular momentum of such H photon?
LA
The first four spectral lines in the Lyman serics of a H-atom are
= 1218 , 1028, 974.3 and 951.4. If instead of Hydrogen,
we consider Deuterium, calculate the shift in the wavelength of
these lines.
12.25
Deutrium was discovered in 1932 by Harold Urey by measuring

the small change in wavelength for a particular transition in 1H
and 2H. This is because, the wavelength of transition depend to a
certain extent on the nuclear mass. If nuclear motion is taken
into account then the electrons and nucleus revolve around their
common centre of mass. Such a system is equivalent to a single
particle with a reduced mass , revolving around the nucleus at
a distance equal to the electron-nucleus separation. Here
= meM/(me +M) where M is the nuclear mass and me is the
electronic mass. Estimate the percentage difference in wavelength
for the 1st line of the Lyman series in 1H and 2H. (Mass of 1H
nucleus is 1.6725 10 27 kg, Mass of 2 H nucleus is
3.3374 1027 kg, Mass of electron = 9.109 1031 kg.)
12.26
If a proton had a radius R and the charge was uniformly

distributed, calculate using Bohr theory, the ground state energy
of a H-atom when (i) R = 0.1, and (ii) R = 10 .
no
12.24
12.27
In the Auger process an atom makes a transition to a lower state

without emitting a photon. The excess energy is transferred to
an outer electron which may be ejected by the atom. (This is
called an Auger electron). Assuming the nucleus to be massive,
calculate the kinetic energy of an n = 4 Auger electron emitted
by Chromium by absorbing the energy from a n = 2 to n = 1
transition.
79
12.28
The inverse square law in electrostatics is | F |=
e2
( 4 0 ) .r 2
for the
1
force between an electron and a proton. The dependence of
r
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
| F | can be understood in quantum theory as being due to the

fact that the particle of light (photon) is massless. If photons had
a
mass
m p,
force
would
be
modified
to
| F |=
h
1
.
+ .e p ( r ) where = m p c / h and h =
2
2
( 4 0 ) r r r
e2
Estimate the change in the ground state energy of a H-atom if mp

were 106 times the mass of an electron.
12.29
The Bohr model for the H-atom relies on the Coulombs law of
electrostatics. Coulombs law has not directly been verified for
very short distances of the order of angstroms. Supposing
Coulombs law between two opposite charge + q1, q2 is modified
to
| F |=
q1q 2 1
,
( 4 0 ) r 2
r R0
q1q2 1 R 0
, r R0
4 0 R 02 r
no
Calculate in such a case, the ground state energy of a H-atom, if

= 0.1, R0 = 1.
80
Chapter Thirteen
MCQ I
13.1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
NUCLEI
Suppose we consider a large number of containers each

containing initially 10000 atoms of a radioactive material with a
half life of 1 year. After 1 year,
no
(a) all the containers will have 5000 atoms of the material.
(b) all the containers will contain the same number of atoms of
the material but that number will only be approximately 5000.
(c) the containers will in general have different numbers of the
atoms of the material but their average will be close to 5000.
(d) none of the containers can have more than 5000 atoms.
13.2
The gravitational force between a H-atom and another particle of

mass m will be given by Newtons law:
M .m
, where r is in km and
r2
(a) M = mproton + m electron.
F =G
(b) M = mproton + melectron B (B = 13.6 eV).

c2
(c) M is not related to the mass of the hydrogen atom.
|V |
(|V | = magnitude of the potential
c2
energy of electron in the H-atom).
(d) M = mproton + m electron

13.3
When a nucleus in an atom undergoes a radioactive decay, the

electronic energy levels of the atom
do not change for any type of radioactivity .
change for and radioactivity but not for -radioactivity.
change for -radioactivity but not for others.
change for -radioactivity but not for others.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
13.4
Mx and My denote the atomic masses of the parent and the daughter
nuclei respectively in a radioactive decay. The Q-value for a
decay is Q1 and that for a + decay is Q2. If me denotes the mass of
an electron, then which of the following statements is correct?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
13.5
Q1 = (Mx My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx My 2me)c2

Q1 = (Mx My) c2 and Q2 = (Mx My )c2
Q1 = (Mx My 2me) c2 and Q2 = (Mx My +2 me)c2
Q1 = (Mx My + 2me) c2 and Q2 = (Mx My +2 me)c2
Tritium is an isotope of hydrogen whose nucleus Triton contains

2 neutrons and 1 proton. Free neutrons decay into p + e + . If
3
one of the neutrons in Triton decays, it would transform into He
nucleus. This does not happen. This is because
3
(a) Triton energy is less than that of a He nucleus.

(b) the electron created in the beta decay process cannot remain
in the nucleus.
(c) both the neutrons in triton have to decay simultaneously
resulting in a nucleus with 3 protons, which is not a He3
nucleus.
(d) because free neutrons decay due to external perturbations
which is absent in a triton nucleus.
13.6. Heavy stable nucle have more neutrons than protons. This is
because of the fact that
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
13.7
82
neutrons are heavier than protons.

electrostatic force between protons are repulsive.
neutrons decay into protons through beta decay.
nuclear forces between neutrons are weaker than that between
protons.
In a nuclear reactor, moderators slow down the neutrons which

come out in a fission process. The moderator used have light
nuclei. Heavy nuclei will not serve the purpose because
Nuclei
(a) they will break up.

(b) elastic collision of neutrons with heavy nuclei will not slow
them down.
(c) the net weight of the reactor would be unbearably high.
(d) substances with heavy nuclei do not occur in liquid or gaseous
state at room temperature.
13.8
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
MCQ II
Fusion processes, like combining two deuterons to form a He
nucleus are impossible at ordinary temperatures and pressure.
The reasons for this can be traced to the fact:
(a) nuclear forces have short range.

(b) nuclei are positively charged.
(c) the original nuclei must be completely ionized before fusion
can take place.
(d) the original nuclei must first break up before combining with
each other.
13.9
Samples of two radioactive nuclides A and B are taken. A and B

are the disintegration constants of A and B respectively. In which
of the following cases, the two samples can simultaneously have
the same decay rate at any time?
(a) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B

and A = B.
(b) Initial rate of decay of A is twice the initial rate of decay of B
and A > B.
(c) Initial rate of decay of B is twice the initial rate of decay of A
and A > B.
(d) Initial rate of decay of B is same as the rate of decay of A at
t = 2h and B < A.
13.10
The variation of decay rate of two radioactive samples A and B

with time is shown in Fig. 13.1.
Which of the following statements are true?
no
(a) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B, hence A

always decays faster than B.
(b) Decay constant of B is greater than that of A but its
decay rate is always smaller than that of A.
(c) Decay constant of A is greater than that of B but it does
not always decay faster than B.
(d) Decay constant of B is smaller than that of A but still its
decay rate becomes equal to that of A at a later instant.
dN
dt
B
A
t
Fig. 13.1
83
VSA
dN
dt
He 23 and He13 nuclei have the same mass number. Do they have
the same binding energy?
13.12
Draw a graph showing the variation of decay rate with number

of active nuclei.
13.13
Which sample, A or B shown in Fig. 13.2 has shorter mean-life?
13.14
Which one of the following cannot emit radiation and why?
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
13.11
Excited nucleus, excited electron.
Fig. 13.2
13.15
In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other

to produce gamma radiation. How is the momentum conserved?
SA
13.16
Why do stable nuclei never have more protons than neutrons?
13.17
Consider a radioactive nucleus A which decays to a stable nucleus

C through the following sequence:
ABC
Here B is an intermediate nuclei which is also radioactive.

Considering that there are N0 atoms of A initially, plot the graph
showing the variation of number of atoms of A and B versus time.
A piece of wood from the ruins of an ancient building was found

to have a 14C activity of 12 disintegrations per minute per gram
of its carbon content. The 14C activity of the living wood is 16
disintegrations per minute per gram. How long ago did the tree,
from which the wooden sample came, die? Given half-life of 14C is
5760 years.
13.19
Are the nucleons fundamental particles, or do they consist of

still smaller parts? One way to find out is to probe a nucleon just
as Rutherford probed an atom. What should be the kinetic energy
of an electron for it to be able to probe a nucleon? Assume the
diameter of a nucleon to be approximately 1015 m.
13.20
A nuclide 1 is said to be the mirror isobar of nuclide 2 if Z1 =N2

23
and Z2 =N1 . (a) What nuclide is a mirror isobar of 11
Na ? (b) Which
nuclide out of the two mirror isobars have greater binding energy
and why?
no
13.18
84
Nuclei
LA
13.21
Sometimes a radioactive nucleus decays into a nucleus which

itself is radioactive. An example is :
38
half-life
Sulphur
=2.48 h
38
half-life
Cl
= 0.62h
38
Ar (stable)
38
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Assume that we start with 1000 S nuclei at time t = 0. The

number of 38Cl is of count zero at t = 0 and will again be zero at
t = . At what value of t, would the number of counts be a
maximum?
13.22
Deuteron is a bound state of a neutron and a proton with a

binding energy B = 2.2 MeV. A -ray of energy E is aimed at a
deuteron nucleus to try to break it into a (neutron + proton)
such that the n and p move in the direction of the incident -ray.
If E = B, show that this cannot happen. Hence calculate how
much bigger than B must E be for such a process to happen.
13.23
The deuteron is bound by nuclear forces just as H-atom is made

up of p and e bound by electrostatic forces. If we consider the
force between neutron and proton in deuteron as given in the
form of a Coulomb potential but with an effective charge e :
F =
e 2
4 0 r
1
estimate the value of (e/e) given that the binding energy of a

deuteron is 2.2 MeV.
13.24
Before the neutrino hypothesis, the beta decay process was

throught to be the transition,
n p +e
no
If this was true, show that if the neutron was at rest, the proton
and electron would emerge with fixed energies and calculate
them.Experimentally, the electron energy was found to have a
large range.
13.25
The activity R of an unknown radioactive nuclide is measured

at hourly intervals. The results found are tabulated as follows:
t (h)
R (MBq)
100
35.36
12.51
4.42
1.56
85
(i) Plot the graph of R versus t and calculate half-life from the
graph.
R
(ii) Plot the graph of ln
versus t and obtain the value of
R0
half-life from the graph.
Nuclei with magic no. of proton Z = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 52 and
magic no. of neutrons N = 2, 8, 20, 28, 50, 82 and 126 are found
to be very stable. (i) Verify this by calculating the proton
separation energy Sp for 120Sn (Z = 50) and 121Sb = (Z = 51).
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
13.26
The proton separation energy for a nuclide is the minimum

energy required to separate the least tightly bound proton from
a nucleus of that nuclide. It is given by
Sp = (MZ1, N + MH MZ,N ) c 2.
Given 119 In = 118.9058u, 120 Sn

121
Sb = 120.903824u, 1H = 1.0078252u.
119.902199u,
no
(ii) What does the existance of magic number indicate?
86
Chapter Fourteen
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
SEMICONDUCTOR
ELECTRONICS
MATERIALS, DEVICES
AND SIMPLE CIRCUITS
MCQ I
14.1
The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in

temperature because
number density of free current carriers increases.

relaxation time increases.
both number density of carriers and relaxation time increase.
number density of current carriers increases, relaxation time
decreases but effect of decrease in relaxation time is much less
than increase in number density.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14.2
In Fig. 14.1, Vo is the potential barrier across a p-n

junction, when no battery is connected across the junction
3
V0
(a) 1 and 3 both correspond to forward bias of junction

(b) 3 corresponds to forward bias of junction and 1
corresponds to reverse bias of junction
(c) 1 corresponds to forward bias and 3 corresponds to reverse
bias of junction.
Fig. 14.1
(d) 3 and 1 both correspond to reverse bias of junction.
14.3
In Fig. 14.2, assuming the diodes to be ideal,
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) D1 is forward biased and D2 is reverse biased and hence current

flows from A to B
(b) D2 is forward biased and D1 is reverse biased and hence no
current flows from B to A and vice versa.
(c) D1and D2 are both
R
D1
A
forward biased 10V
and
hence
current flows
from A to B.
D2
(d) D 1 and D 2 are
both
reverse
B
Fig. 14.2
biased and hence
no current flows
from A to B and vice versa.
14.4
A
220V
A.c.
B
A 220 V A.C. supply is connected between points A and B

(Fig. 14.3). What will be the potential difference V across the
capacitor?
(a) 220V.
(b) 110V.
(c) 0V.
(d) 220 2 V.
Fig. 14.3
14.5
Hole is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14.6
an anti-particle of electron.
a vacancy created when an electron leaves a covalent bond.
absence of free electrons.
an artifically created particle.
The output of the given circuit in Fig. 14.4.
no
(a) would be zero at all times.
vm sin wt ~
Fig. 14.4
88
(b) would be like a half wave rectifier with positive

cycles in output.
(c) would be like a half wave rectifier with negative
cycles in output.
(d) would be like that of a full wave rectifier.
Semiconductor Electronics: Materials

Devices and Simple Circuits
In the circuit shown in Fig. 14.5, if the diode forward voltage drop
is 0.3 V, the voltage difference between A and B is
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14.8
0.2 mA
1.3 V
2.3 V
0
0.5 V
5K
Truth table for the given circuit (Fig. 14.6) is

(a) A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
5K
E
1
0
1
0
Fig. 14.5
(b) A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
E
1
0
0
1
(c) A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
E
0
1
0
1
(d) A
0
0
1
1
B
0
1
0
1
E
0
1
1
0
MCQ II
Fig. 14.6
When an electric field is applied across a semiconductor
(a) electrons move from lower energy level to higher energy level
in the conduction band.
(b) electrons move from higher energy level to lower energy level
in the conduction band.
(c) holes in the valence band move from higher energy level to
lower energy level.
(d) holes in the valence band move from lower energy level to
higher energy level.
no
14.9
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
14.7
89
14.10
Consider an npn transitor with its base-emitter junction forward

biased and collector base junction reverse biased. Which of the
following statements are true?.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Vo
Electrons crossover from emitter to collector.

Holes move from base to collector.
Electrons move from emitter to base.
Electrons from emitter move out of base without going to the
collector.
14.11
0.6V
2V
Figure 14.7 shows the transfer characteristics of a base biased

CE transistor. Which of the following statements are true?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Vi
Fig. 14.7
14.12
In a npn transistor circuit, the collector current is 10mA. If

95 per cent of the electrons emitted reach the collector, which of
the following statements are true?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14.13
At Vi = 0.4V, transistor is in active state.

At Vi = 1V , it can be used as an amplifier.
At Vi = 0..5V, it can be used as a switch turned off.
At Vi = 2.5V, it can be used as a switch turned on.
The emitter current will be 8 mA.

The emitter current will be 10.53 mA.
The base current will be 0.53 mA.
The base current will be 2 mA.
In the depletion region of a diode
(a) there are no mobile charges

(b) equal number of holes and electrons exist, making the
region neutral.
(c) recombination of holes and electrons has taken place.
(d) immobile charged ions exist.
no
14.14
90
What happens during regulation action of a Zener diode?
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
14.15
The current in and voltage across the Zenor remains fixed.

The current through the series Resistance (Rs) changes.
The Zener resistance is constant.
The resistance offered by the Zener changes.
To reduce the ripples in a rectifier circuit with capacitor filter

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
RL should be increased.
input frequency should be decreased.
input frequency should be increased.
capacitors with high capacitance should be used.

14.16
The breakdown in a reverse biased pn junction diode is more

likely to occur due to
VSA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping

concentration is small.
(b) large velocity of the minority charge carriers if the doping
concentration is large.
(c) strong electric field in a depletion region if the doping
concentration is small.
(d) strong electric field in the depletion region if the doping
concentration is large.
14.17
Why are elemental dopants for Silicon or Germanium usually

chosen from group XIII or group XV?
14.18
Sn, C, and Si, Ge are all group XIV elements. Yet, Sn is a

conductor, C is an insulator while Si and Ge are semiconductors.
Why?
14.19
Can the potential barrier across a p-n junction be measured by

simply connecting a voltmeter across the junction?
14.20
Draw the output waveform across the resistor (Fig.14.8).

V0
+1V
0
1V
Input waveform at A
Fig. 14.8
The amplifiers X, Y and Z are connected in series. If the voltage

gains of X, Y and Z are 10, 20 and 30, respectively and the
input signal is 1 mV peak value, then what is the output signal
voltage (peak value)
no
14.21
(i) if dc supply voltage is 10V?

(ii) if dc supply voltage is 5V?
14.22
In a CE transistor amplifier there is a current and voltage gain

associated with the circuit. In other words there is a power gain.
Considering power a measure of energy, does the circuit voilate
conservation of energy?
91
S.A
I
(mA)
14.23
V
(volt)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
Fig. 14.9
(i) Name the type of a diode whose characteristics are shown in

Fig. 14.9 (A) and Fig. 14.9(B).
(ii) What does the point P in Fig. (A) represent?
(iii) What does the points P and Q in Fig. (B) represent?
14.24
Three photo diodes D1, D2 and D3 are made of semiconductors

having band gaps of 2.5eV, 2eV and 3eV, respectively. Which
0
ones will be able to detect light of wavelength 6000 A ?
14.25
If the resistance R1 is increased (Fig.14.10), how will the readings

of the ammeter and voltmeter change?
A
R2
R1
no
Fig. 14.10
92
14.26
Two car garages have a common gate which needs to open

automatically when a car enters either of the garages or cars
enter both. Devise a circuit that resembles this situation using
diodes for this situation.
14.27
How would you set up a circuit to obtain NOT gate using a

transistor?
14.28
Explain why elemental semiconductor cannot be used to make

visible LEDs.

14.29
Write the truth table for the circuit shown in Fig.14.11.

Name the gate that the circuit resembles.
14.30
A Zener of power rating 1 W is to be used as a voltage

regulator. If zener has a breakdown of 5V and it has to
regulate voltage which fluctuated between 3V and 7V, what
should be the value of Rs for safe operation (Fig.14.12)?
+ 5V
D1
A
V0
B
D2
Rs
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 14.11
Unregulated
voltage
Regulated
voltage
Fig. 14.12
LA
14.31
14.32
If each diode in Fig. 14.13 has a forward bias resistance of

25 and infinite resistance in reverse bias, what will be the
values of the current I1, I2, I3 and I4?
E
I1
In the circuit shown in Fig.14.14, when the input voltage of the

base resistance is 10V, Vbe is zero and Vce is also zero. Find the
values of Ib, Ic and .
I4
125W
I3
125W
I2
125W
25W
5V
Fig. 14.13
10V
RC
3kW
Rp
Vi
400
kW
Fig. 14.14
Draw the output signals C1 and C2 in the given combination of

gates (Fig. 14.15).
no
14.33
A
4
C1
5 t (s)
B
B
0
5 t (s)
A
C2
B
Fig. 14.15
93
14.34
Consider the circuit arrangement shown in Fig 14.16 (a) for studying input and output characteristics of npn transistor in CE configuration.
ICC
RC
VCE
C
VCC
4mA
IB = 30mA
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
IC
(mA)
RB
VBB
VBE
8V
VCE (Volts)
Fig. 14.16 (b)
Fig. 14.16 (a)
Select the values of RB and RC for a transistor whose VBE = 0.7 V,

so that the transistor is operating at point Q as shown in the
characteristics shown in Fig. 14.16 (b).
Given that the input impedance of the transistor is very small
and VCC = VBB = 16 V, also find the voltage gain and power gain
of circuit making appropriate assumptions.
14.35
Assuming the ideal diode, draw the output waveform for the
circuit given in Fig. 14.17. Explain the waveform.
20 sin wt
5V
no
Fig. 14.17
94
14.36
Suppose a n-type wafer is created by doping Si crystal having

5 1028 atoms/m3 with 1ppm concentration of As. On the
surface 200 ppm Boron is added to create P region in this wafer.
Considering ni = 1.5 1016 m3, (i) Calculate the densities of the
charge carriers in the n & p regions. (ii) Comment which charge
carriers would contribute largely for the reverse saturation
current when diode is reverse biased.

An X-OR gate has following truth table:

A
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
14.37
It is represented by following logic relation
Y =A.B+ A.B
Build this gate using AND, OR and NOT gates.
14.38
Consider a box with three terminals on top of it as shown in

Fig.14.18 (a):
Fig. 14.18 (a)
Three components namely, two germanium diodes and one

resistor are connected across these three terminals in some
arrangement.
A student performs an experiment in which any two of these three
terminals are connected in the circuit shown in Fig. 14.18 (b).
mA
+
V
Box
Terminals
no
VDC
Fig. 14.18 (b)
The student obtains graphs of current-voltage characteristics for

unknown combination of components between the two terminals
connected in the circuit.
95
The graphs are
(i) when A is positive and B is negative
I
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 14.18 (c)
(ii) when A is negative and B is positive

I
0.7V
Fig. 14.18 (d)
(iii) When B is negative and C is positive

I
0.7V
Fig. 14.18 (e)
(iv) When B is positive and C is negative
no
Fig. 14.18 (f)
96
1
= 1000
slope

(v) When A is positive and C is negative

I
V
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Fig. 14.18 (g)
(vi) When A is negative and C is positive

I
1.4V
Fig. 14.18 (h)
VCC = 12V
From these graphs of current voltage characteristic shown in Fig. 14.18 (c) to (h), determine
the arrangement of components between A, B
and C.
14.39 For the transistor circuit shown in Fig.14.19,

evaluate VE, RB, RE given IC = 1 mA, VCE = 3V, VBE
= 0.5 V and VCC = 12 V,
= 100.
RB
20K
RC = 7.8K
VC
RE
14.40 In the circuit shown in Fig.14.20, find the value

of RC.
12V
RC
C
100K
Fig. 14.19
= 100
no
20K
VBE = 0.5 V
VCE = 3 V
Fig. 14.20
97
Chapter Fifteen
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS
MCQ I
15.1
Three waves A, B and C of frequencies 1600 kHz, 5 MHz and

60 MHz, respectively are to be transmitted from one place to
another. Which of the following is the most appropriate mode of
communication:
no
(a) A is transmitted via space wave while B and C are transmitted

via sky wave.
(b) A is transmitted via ground wave, B via sky wave and C via
space wave.
(c) B and C are transmitted via ground wave while A is transmitted
via sky wave.
(d) B is transmitted via ground wave while A and C are transmitted
via space wave.
15.2
A 100m long antenna is mounted on a 500m tall building. The

complex can become a transmission tower for waves with
(a) ~ 400 m.
(b) ~ 25 m.
98
Communication Systems
(c) ~ 150 m.
(d) ~ 2400 m.
A 1 KW signal is transmitted using a communication channel
which provides attenuation at the rate of 2dB per km. If the
communication channel has a total length of 5 km, the power of
P0
the signal received is [gain in dB = 10 log P ]
i
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.4
A speech signal of 3 kHz is used to modulate a carrier signal of

frequency 1 MHz, using amplitude modulation. The frequencies
of the side bands will be
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.5
900 W.
100 W.
990 W.
1010 W.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
15.3
1.003 MHz and 0.997 MHz.

3001 kHz and 2997 kHz.
1003 kHz and 1000 kHz.
1 MHz and 0.997 MHz.
A message signal of frequency m is superposed on a carrier wave

of frequency c to get an amplitude modulated wave (AM).
The frequency of the AM wave will be
(a) m.
(b) C.
(c)
(d)
c m
2
I-V characteristics of four devices are shown in Fig. 15.1
no
15.6
c + m
(i)
(ii)
V
(iii)
(iv)
Fig. 15.1
99
Identify devices that can be used for modulation:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
A male voice after modulation-transmission sounds like that of

a female to the receiver. The problem is due to
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
15.7
i and iii.
only iii.
ii and some regions of iv.
All the devices can be used.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.8
poor selection of modulation index (selected 0 < m < 1)

poor bandwidth selection of amplifiers.
poor selection of carrier frequency
loss of energy in transmission.
A basic communication system consists of

(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
transmitter.
information source.
user of information.
channel.
receiver.
Choose the correct sequence in which these are arranged in a

basic communication system:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.9
Identify the mathematical expression for amplitude modulated

wave:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
no
ABCDE.
BADEC.
BDACE.
BEADC.
Ac sin [{c + k1vm(t)}t + ].

Ac sin {ct + + k2 vm(t)}.
{Ac + k2 vm(t)} sin (ct + ).
Ac vm(t) sin (ct + ).
MCQ II
15.10
An audio signal of 15kHz frequency cannot be transmitted over

long distances without modulation because
(a) the size of the required antenna would be at least 5 km
which is not convenient.
100
(b) the audio signal can not be transmitted through sky waves.
(c) the size of the required antenna would be at least 20 km,
which is not convenient.
(d) effective power transmitted would be very low, if the size of
the antenna is less than 5 km.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.12
The side band frequencies are 1506 kHz and 1494 kHz.
The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 6kHz.
The bandwidth required for amplitude modulation is 3 MHz.
The side band frequencies are 1503 kHz and 1497 kHz.
A TV trasmission tower has a height of 240 m. Signals broadcast

from this tower will be received by LOS communication at a
distance of (assume the radius of earth to be 6.4 106 m)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
15.13
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
15.11 Audio sine waves of 3 kHz frequency are used to amplitude

modulate a carrier signal of 1.5 MHz. Which of the following
statements are true?
100 km.
24 km.
55 km.
50 km.
The frequency response curve (Fig. 15.2) for the filter circuit
used for production of AM wave should be
Gain
Gain
c + m
c m
(i)
(ii)
Gain
no
Gain
c m
c + m
(iii)
c m c + m
(iv)
Fig. 15.2
101
(a) (i) followed by (ii).
(b) (ii) followed by (i).
(c) (iii).
(d) (iv).
15.14
In amplitude modulation, the modulation index m, is kept less

than or equal to 1 because
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a) m > 1, will result in interference between carrier frequency

and message frequency, resulting into distortion.
(b) m > 1 will result in overlapping of both side bands resulting
into loss of information.
(c) m > 1 will result in change in phase between carrier signal
and message signal.
(d) m > 1 indicates amplitude of message signal greater than
amplitude of carrier signal resulting into distortion.
VSA
15.15 Which of the following would produce analog signals and which
would produce digital signals?
no
(i) A vibrating tuning fork.

(ii) Musical sound due to a vibrating sitar string.
(iii) Light pulse.
(iv) Output of NAND gate.
102
15.16
Would sky waves be suitable for transmission of TV signals of

60 MHz frequency?
15.17
Two waves A and B of frequencies 2 MHz and 3 MHz, respectively

are beamed in the same direction for communication via sky wave.
Which one of these is likely to travel longer distance in the
ionosphere before suffering total internal reflection?
15.18
The maximum amplitude of an A.M. wave is found to be 15 V

while its minimum amplitude is found to be 3 V. What is the
modulation index?
15.19
Compute the LC product of a tuned amplifier circuit required to

generate a carrier wave of 1 MHz for amplitude modulation.
15.20
Why is a AM signal likely to be more noisy than a FM signal

upon transmission through a channel?
SA
15.21 Figure 15.3 shows a communication system. What is the output
power when input signal is of 1.01mW ? (gain in dB = 10 log10
(Po/Pi ).
10dB
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
20dB
Loss 2dB km 1
Input
Output
5.0 km
Amplifier
Amplifier
Fig. 15.3
15.22 A TV transmission tower antenna is at a height of 20 m. How

much service area can it cover if the receiving antenna is (i) at
ground level, (ii) at a height of 25 m? Calculate the percentage
increase in area covered in case (ii) relative to case (i).
15.23 If the whole earth is to be connected by LOS communication

using space waves (no restriction of antenna size or tower height),
what is the minimum number of antennas required? Calculate
the tower height of these antennas in terms of earths radius?
no
15.24 The maximum frequency for reflection of sky waves from a certain
layer of the ionosphere is found to be fmax = 9(Nmax)1/2, where Nmax
is the maximum electron density at that layer of the ionosphere.
On a certain day it is observed that signals of frequencies higher
than 5MHz are not received by reflection from the F1 layer of the
ionosphere while signals of frequencies higher than 8MHz are
not received by reflection from the F2 layer of the inonosphere.
Estimate the maximum electron densities of the F1 and F2 layers
on that day.
15.25 On radiating (sending out) an AM modulated signal, the total
radiated power is due to energy carried by c, c m & c + m.
Suggest ways to minimise cost of radiation without
compromising on information.
103
LA
15.26
(i) The intensity of a light pulse travelling along a communication

channel decreases exponentially with distance x according
to the relation I = Ioex, where Io is the intensity at x = 0 and
is the attenuation constant.
Show that the intensity reduces by 75 per cent after a distance
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ln 4
of

(ii) Attenuation of a signal can be expressed in decibel (dB)
I
according to the relation dB =10 log10 . What is the
Io
attenuation in dB/km for an optical fibre in which the
intensity falls by 50 per cent over a distance of 50 km?
15.27
A 50 MHz sky wave takes 4.04 ms to reach a receiver via

re-transmission from a satellite 600 km above earths surface.
Assuming re-transmission time by satellite negligible, find
the distance between source and receiver. If communication
between the two was to be done by Line of Sight (LOS) method,
what should size and placement of receiving and transmitting
antenna be?
15.28
An amplitude modulated wave is as shown in Fig. 15.4. Calculate

(i) the percentage modulation, (ii) peak carrier voltage and,
(iii) peak value of information voltage.
100V
no
20V
104
Fig. 15.4
15.29
(i) Draw the plot of amplitude versus for an amplitude

modulated wave whose carrier wave (c) is carrying two
modulating signals, 1 and 2 (2 > 1). [Hint: Follow
derivation from Eq 15.6 of NCERT Textbook of XII]
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii) Is the plot symmetrical about c? Comment especially about

plot in region < c.
(iii) Extrapolate and predict the problems one can expect if more
waves are to be modulated.
(iv) Suggest solutions to the above problem. In the process can
one understand another advantage of modulation in terms
of bandwidth?
no
15.30 An audio signal is modulated by a carrier wave of 20MHz such

that the bandwidth required for modulation is 3kHz. Could this
wave be demodulated by a diode detector which has the values
of R and C as
(i) R = 1 k, C = 0.01F.
(ii) R = 10 k, C = 0.01F.
(iii) R = 10 k, C = 0.1F.
105
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ANSWERS
Chapter
1.1
(a)
1.2
(a)
1.3
(d)
1.4
(b)
1.5
(c)
1.6
(a)
1.7
(a)
1.8
(c), (d)
1.9
(b), (d)
1.10
(b), (d)
1.11
(c), (d)
1.12
(a), (c).
1.13
(a), (b), (c) and (d).
1.14
Zero.
1.15
(i)
1.16
The electric fields bind the atoms to neutral entity. Fields are caused
by excess charges. There can be no excess charge on the inter surface
of an isolated conductor.
1.17
No, the field may be normal. However, the converse is true.
no
Q
4 R12
106
(ii)
Q
4 R 22
Answers
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1.18
Top view
Side view
q
q
q
q
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
.
8 0
4 0
2 0
2 0
1.19
(i)
1.20
1 Molar mass M of Al has NA = 6.023 1023 atoms.

m = mass of Al paisa coin has N = N A
m
atoms
M
Now, ZAl = 13, MAl = 26.9815g
Hence N = 6.02 1023 atoms/mol
0.75
26.9815g/mol
= 1.6733 1022 atoms
= +ve charge in paisa = N Ze

22
= (1.67 10 )(13) (1.60 10
19
C)
= 3.48 10 C.
4
q = 34.8 kC of ve charge.
This is an enormous amount of charge. Thus we see that ordinary neutral
matter contains enormous amount of charges.
1.21
(i) F1 =
no
(ii)
(iii)
Nm 2 (3.48 10 C)
= 8.99 109
= 1.1 1023 N
4
2
2
4 r
10
m
C
2
0 1
F2 r12 (10 2 m)2

=
=
= 10 8 F2 = F1 10 8 = 1.1 1015 N
F1 r22 (102 m)2
F3 r12 (10 2 m)2
=
=
= 10 16
F1 r32 (106 m)2
F3 = 1016 F1 = 1.1 107 N.

Conclusion: When separated as point charges these charges exert an
enormous force. It is not easy to disturb electrical neutrality.
107
1.22
(i) Zero, from symmetry.

(ii) Removing a +ve Cs ion is equivalent to adding singly charged -ve
Cs ion at that location.
Net force then is
F =
e2
4 0 r 2
where r = distance between the Cl ion and a Cs ion.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= (0.20)2 +(0.20)2 +(0.20)2 10 9 = 3(0.20)2 10 9
= 0.346 109 m
Hence, F =
(8.99109 )(1.6 10 19 )2
= 192 10 11
(0.34610 9 )2
= 1.92 109 N
Ans 1.92 109 N, directed from A to Cl
1.23
At P: on 2q, Force due to q is to the left and that due to 3q is to the

right.
2q 2
6q 2
=
2
4 0 x
4 0 (d + x )2
(d + x)2 = 3x2
2q
2x2 2dx d2 = 0
x =
d
3d
2
2
(ve sign would be between q and 3q and hence is unaceptable.)

x =
1.24
d
3d d
+
= (1 + 3) to the left of q.
2
2
2
(a) Charges A and C are positive since lines of force emanate from them.
no
(b) Charge C has the largest magnitude since maximum number of

field lines are associated with it.
(c) (i) near A. There is no neutral point between a positive and a negative
charge. A neutral point may exist between two like charges. From
the figure we see that a neutral point exists between charges A and
C. Also between two like charges the neutral point is closer to the
charge with smaller magnitude. Thus, electric field is zero near
charge A.
1.25
(a) (i) zero
(ii)
(b) same as (a).
108
uuuur
q
along OA
2
4 0 r
(iii)
uuuur
2q
along OA
2
4 0 r
3q
Answers
1.26
(a) Let the Universe have a radius R. Assume that the hydrogen atoms
are uniformly distributed. The charge on each hydrogen atom is
eH = (1 + y) e + e = ye = |ye|
The mass of each hydrogen atom is ~ mp (mass of proton). Expansion
starts if the Coulumb repulsion on a hydrogen atom, at R, is larger
than the gravitational attraction.
Let the Electric Field at R be E. Then
4
R 33 N ye (Gausss law)
3 o
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4R2 E =
E (R) =
1 N ye
R r
3 o
Let the gravitational field at R be GR. Then

4R2 GR = 4 G m p
GR =
4
R 3N
3
4
Gm NR
3
GR (R ) =
4
Gm N R r
3
Thus the Coulombic force on a hydrogen atom at R is
yeE (R) =
1 Ny 2e2
R r
3 o
The gravitional force on this atom is
4
GNm 2pR r
3
The net force on the atom is
m pGR ( R ) =
1 Ny 2e 2
4
F =
R
GNm 2pR r
3
3
The critical value is when

2
1 Ny C e
4
R=
GNm p2R
3 o
3
no
y 2c = 4 oG
m 2p
e2
7 10 11 1.82 106 81 10 62
9 109 1.6 2 10 38
63 10 38
yC
8 10 19
10 18
(b) Because of the net force, the hydrogen atom experiences an

acceleration such that
109
mp
d 2 R 1 Ny 2e 2
4p
=
R
GNm 2p R
dt 2
3
e
3
o
Or,
d 2R
1 1 Ny2e 2 4p
= a 2 R where 2 =
GNm 2p
2
dt
3
m p 3 eo
This has a solution R = Ae at + Be at

As we are seeking an expansion, B = 0.
1.27
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
R = Ae t
.
R = Ae t = R
Thus, the velocity is proportional to the distance from the centre.
(a) The symmetry of the problem suggests that the electric field is radial.
For points r < R, consider a spherical Gaussian surfaces. Then on
the surface
1
Er .dS = o V dv
4 r 2Er =
=
4 k r 3dr
1 4 k 4
r
o 4
1
kr 2 r
4 o
For points r > R, consider a spherical Gaussian surfaces of radius

r,
Er .dS = o dv
V
4 k
dr
no
4 r 2E r =
Er =
4 k R 4
o 4
k R4
4 o r 2
E (r ) = (k /4 o ) ( R 4 / r 2 )r
110
1
Er =
kr 2
4 o
E (r ) =
Answers
(b) The two protons must be on the opposite sides of the centre along
a diameter. Suppose the protons are at a distance r from the
centre.
R
Now, 4 kr 3dr = 2e
o
4 k 4
R = 2e
4
2e
k =
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
R4
Consider the forces on proton 1. The attractive force due to the

charge distribution is
e Er =
e
2e 2 r 2
kr 2r =
r
4 o
4 o R 4
The repulsive force is
e2
1
r
4 o ( 2r )2
e2
2e 2 r 2
r
Net force is
2
4 o R 4
4 o 4r
This is zero such that
e2
16 or
Or, r 4 =
r =
2e 2 r 2
4 o R 4
4R 4 R 4
=
32
8
R
(8)1/ 4
Thus, the protons must be at a distance r =
1.28
(a) The electric field at
due to plate is
no
The electric field at due to plate is
x
S 2 o
x
S 2 o
Hence, the net electric field is
-Q
R
from the centre.
8
E1 =
(Q q )
2 o S
(x
)
(b) During the collision plates & are together and hence must be at
one potential. Suppose the charge on is q1 and on is q2. Consider
a point O. The electric field here must be zero.
Electric field at 0 due to =
x
2 oS
111
Electric field at 0 due to =
q1
x
2 oS
Electric Field at 0 due to =
q2
x
2 o S
b g
o
q1
( Q + q2 )
q
+ 1 =0
2 o S
2 o S
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
q1 q 2 = Q
q2
Further, q1 + q2 = Q + q
q1 = Q + q /2
and q2 = q/2
Thus the charge on and are Q + q/2 and q/2, respectively.
(c) Let the velocity be v at the distance d after the collision. If m is the
mass of the plate , then the gain in K.E. over the round trip must
be equal to the work done by the electric field.
After the collision, the electric field at is
E2 =
2 o S
x +
(Q + q /2 )
x=
2 o S
q /2
x
2 o S
The work done when the plate is released till the collision is F1d
where F1 is the force on plate .
The work done after the collision till it reaches d is F2d where F2 is
the force on plate .
F1 = E1Q =
(Q q ) Q
2 o S
and F2 = E 2q /2 =
( q /2 )2
2 o S
Total work done is
1
1
(Q q ) Q + ( q /2 )2 d =
( Q q /2 )2 d
2 o S
2 oS
(1/2)mv 2 =
2 o S
(Q q /2 )2
1/ 2
no
d
v = ( Q q /2 )
m oS
1.29
(i)
F =
Qq
r2
= 1dyne =
[1esu of charge]2
[1cm]2
Or,
1 esu of charge = 1 (dyne)1/2 (cm)
Hence, [1 esu of charge] = [F]1/2 L = [MLT2]1/2 L = M1/2 L3/2 T1
[1 esu of charge] = M1/2 L3/2 T1
Thus charge in cgs unit is expressed as fractional powers (1/2) of M
and (3/2) of L.
112
Answers
(ii) Consider the coloumb force on two charges, each of magnitude
1 esu of charge separated by a distance of 1 cm:
The force is then 1 dyne = 105 N.
This situation is equivalent to two charges of magnitude x C
separated by 102m.
This gives:
F =
1
4 0
x2
10 4
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
which should be 1 dyne = 105 N. Thus
4 0
x2
1
10 9 Nm 2
5
=
10
=
10 4
4 0
x 2 C2
With x =
4 0
1
, this yields
[3] 109
= 10 9 [3]2 1018 = [3]2 109
Nm 2
C2
With [3] 2.99792458, we get
4 0
1.30
q x
F =
Nm 2
exactly
C2
Net force F on q towards the centre O
F =2
= 8.98755.... 109
q2
4 0r
cos =
2q 2 x
.
4 0r 2 r
2q 2
x
4 0 (d 2 + x 2 )3 / 2
2q 2
x = kxfor x << d.
4 0d 3
no
Thus, the force on the third charge q is proportional to the

displacement and is towards the centre of the two other charges.
Therefore, the motion of the third charge is harmonic with frequency
1.31
2q 2
k
=
4 0d 3m
m
1/ 2
3
3
and hence T = 2 8 0md

2

q
(a) Slight push on q along the axis of the ring gives rise to the situation
shown in Fig (b). A and B are two points on the ring at the end of a
diameter.
113
Q
1
1
.q.
. .cos
2 R 4 0 r 2
Qq
1
z
. 2
. 2
2
R.4 0 ( z + R ) ( z + R 2 )1/ 2
Axis of the ring

Total charge Q
F A + B = 2.
Q
at A and B is
2 R
Force on q due to line elements
(a)
Total force due to ring on q = (FA+B)(R)
Qq
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
=
z
2
4 0 (z + R 2 )3/2
Qq for
z z << R
4 0
Thus, the force is propotional to negative of displacement. Motion

under such forces is harmonic.
(b) From (a)
d 2z
Qqz
d 2z
Qq
or
=
...
=
z
2
3
dt
40 R
dt 2
40mR 3
That is, 2 =
Qq
. Hence T = 2 4 0mR
4 0mR 3
Qq
Chapter
(d)
2.2
(c)
2.3
(c)
2.4
(c)
2.5
(a)
2.6
(c)
2.7
(b), (c), (d)
2.8
(a), (b), (c)
2.9
(b), (c)
2.10
(b), (c)
2.11
(a), (d)
2.12
(a), (b)
2.13
(c) and (d)
no
2.1
114
(b)
Answers
More.
2.15
Higher potential.
2.16
Yes, if the sizes are different.
2.17
No.
2.18
As electric field is conservative, work done will be zero in both the

cases.
2.19
Suppose this were not true. The potential just inside the surface
would be different from that at the surface resulting in a potential
gradient. This would mean that there are field lines pointing inwards
or outwards from the surface. These lines cannot at the other end be
again on the surface, since the surface is equipotential. Thus, this
is possible only if the other end of the lines are at charges inside,
contradicting the premise. Hence, the entire volume inside must be
at the same potential.
2.20
C will decrease
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2.14
1
CV 2 and hence will increase.
2
Electric field will increase.
Charge stored will remain the same.
V will increase.
Energy stored =
2.21
Consider any path from the charged conductor to the uncharged

conductor along the electric field. The potential will continually decrease
along this path. A second path from the uncharged conductor to infinity
will again continually lower the potential further. Hence this result.
2.22
U=
The charge q displaced would perform oscillations. We cannot conclude

anything just by looking at the graph.
2.23
+ + + +
+ +
no
+ +
The variation of potential energy with z is shown in the figure.
+ +
r
+ + + +
+
+
qQ
4 0R 1 + z 2 R 2
2.24
V=
1
4 0
R + z2
To find the potential at distance r from the line consider the electric
field. We note that from symmetry the field lines must be radially
outward. Draw a cylindrical Gaussian surface of radius r and length l.
Then
l
1
E.dS = 0 l
115
Or E r 2 rl =
Er =
2 0 r
Hence, if r0 is the radius,

r
V (r) V (r0 ) = E.dl =

r0
2 0
ln
r0
r
ln
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
For a given V,
r
2 0
=
[V(r) V(r0 )]
r0
r = r0 e
20Vr0 / +2 0V(r) /
.e
The equipotential surfaces are cylinders of radius

r = r0 e
2.25
20 [V(r)V(r0 )]/
Let the plane be at a distance x from the origin. The potential at the
point P is
4 0 ( x + d /2 )2 + h 2 1/ 2
If this is to be zero.
1
1/2
4 0 ( x d /2 )2 + h 2 1/ 2
-q
2q
1/ 2
-d/2
o x
x 2 dx + d 2 /4 = x 2 + dx + d 2 /4
Or, 2dx = 0
x=0
The equation is that of a plane x = 0.
2.26
Let the final voltage be U: If C is the capacitance of the capacitor without

the dielectric, then the charge on the capacitor is
Q1 = CU
The capacitor with the dielectric has a capacitance C. Hence the charge
on the capacitor is
= CU 2
no
Q2 = U
The initial charge on the capacitor that was charged is

Q0 = CU0
From the conservation of charges,
Q0 = Q1 + Q2
Or, CU0 = CU + CU2
U 2 + U u0 = 0
U =
116
1 1 + 4U 0
2
( x d /2 ) + h
( x + d /2 ) + h
Or, (x-d/2)2 + h2 = (x+d/2)2 + h2
2
d/2
Answers
1 1 + 624
4
1 625
volts
4
As U is positive
=
U =
When the disc is in touch with the bottom plate, the entire plate is a
equipotential. A change q is transferred to the disc.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2.27
625 1 24
=
= 6V
4
4
The electric field on the disc is
V
d
V 2
r
d
The force acting on the disc is
q = 0
V
V2
q = 0 2 r 2
d
d
If the disc is to be lifted, then
V2 2
r = mg
d2
V =
2.28
U=
mgd 2
0r 2
1 qd q d qu q d qu q d
4 0 r
r
r
9109
1.6 10 19
10 15
) {(1 3 )
( 2 3 )(1 3 ) ( 2 3 )(1 3 )
1 4
14
= 2.304 1013 = 7.68 10 J
9
9
= 4.8 105 eV = 0.48 MeV = 5.11 104 (mnc2)
no
2.29
Before contact
Q1 = .4 R 2
Q2 = .4 (2 R 2 ) = 4 ( .4 R2 ) = 4Q1
After contact :
Q1 + Q2 = Q1 + Q2 = 5Q1 ,
=5( .4 R 2 )
117
They will be at equal potentials:
Q1 Q2
=
R 2R
Q2 = 2Q .
Q1 =
5
10
.4 R 2 and Q 2 =
.4 R 2
3
3
1 = 5 3
2.30
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3Q1 = 5 .4 R 2
and 2 =
Initially : V
5
.
6
1
and V1 + V2 = E
C
V1 =3 V and V 2 =6V
Q1 = C1V1 = 6C 3 =18 C
C1
K1
()
K2
()
Q2 = 9 C and Q3 = 0
Later : Q2 = Q2 + Q3
with C2V + C3V = Q2
C3
E = 9V
V =
C2
Q2
= (3 2) V
C2 +C3
Q2 = (9 2) C and Q3 = (9 2) C
2.31
Q
R2
1 .2 r dr
4 0
r 2 + z2
no
dU =
U =
4 0
2rdr
r 2 + z2
r
R
118
Answers
z
q1
R
2 2
2 2 2
2
r
+
z
=
R +z z
O 4 0
4 0
2Q 2 2
R +z z
4 0R 2
O
q2
q1
2.32
x + y + (z d )
q2
x + y + (z + d )
=0
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
q1
x + y + (z d )
q2
x + y + (z + d )
Thus, to have total potential zero, q1 and q2 must have opposite

signs. Squaring and simplifying, we get.
( q q )2 + 1
x 2 + y2 + z 2 + 1 2 2
(2zd ) + d 2 = 0
( q1 q2 ) 1
q12 + q12
This is the equation of a sphere with centre at 0,0, 2d 2
2
.
q1 q1
Note : if q1 = q2 Then z = 0, which is a plane through mid-point.
2.33
U=
U=
4 0
2
q 2
q
+
(d x ) (d x )
q 2
4 0
(d
2d
x2
dU q 2 .2d
2x
=
.
2
dx 4 0
d x2
2q 2
4 0d
no
U0 =
dU
= 0 at x = 0
dx
x = 0 is an equilibrium point.
2
d2U 2dq 2
=
2
2
dx 4 0 d x 2
8x 2
2
2 3
(d x )
119
2dq 2
1
2
2
=
2
2 3 2 d x
4
(
d
x
)
0
8 x 2
At x = 0
d 2U 2dq 2 1
2
=
(2d ) , which is < 0.

dx 2 4 0 d 6
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Hence, unstable equilibrium.
Chapter
3.1
(b)
3.2
(a)
3.3
(c)
3.4
(b)
3.5
(a)
3.6
(a)
3.7
(b), (d)
3.8
(a), (d)
3.9
(a), (b)
3.10
(b), (c)
3.11
(a), (c)
3.12
When an electron approaches a junction, in addition to the uniform
E that it normally faces (which keep the drift velocity v d fixed), there
are accumulation of charges on the surface of wires at the junction.
These produce electric field. These fields alter direction of momentum.
Relaxation time is bound to depend on velocities of electrons and

ions. Applied electric field affects the velocities of electrons by speeds
at the order of 1mm/s, an insignificant effect. Change in T, on the
other hand, affects velocities at the order of 102 m/s. This can affect
significantly.
no
3.13
[ = (E,T ) in which E dependence is ignorable for ordinary applied

voltages.]
3.14
120
The advantage of null point method in a Wheatstone bridge is that the

resistance of galvanometer does not affect the balance point and there
is no need to determine current in resistances and galvanometer and
the internal resistance of a galvanometer. Runknown can be calculated
Answers
applying Kirchhoff s rules to the circuit. We would need additional
accurate measurement of all the currents in resistances and
galvanometer and internal resistance of the galvanometer.
The metal strips have low resistance and need not be counted in the
potentiometer length l1 of the null point. One measures only their lengths
along the straight segments (of lengths 1 meter each). This is easily
done with the help of centimeter rulings or meter ruler and leads to
accurate measurements.
3.16
Two considerations are required: (i) cost of metal, and (ii) good
conductivity of metal. Cost factor inhibits silver. Cu and Al are the next
best conductors.
3.17
Alloys have low value of temperature co-efficient (less temperature

sensitivity) of resistance and high resistivity.
3.18
Power wasted PC = I2RC
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3.15
where RC is the resistance of the connecting wires.
P2
RC
V2
In order to reduce PC, power should be transmitted at high voltage.
PC =
3.19
If R is increased, the current through the wire will decrease and hence
the potential gradient will also decrease, which will result in increase in
balance length. So J will shift towards B.
3.20
(i) Positive terminal of E1 is connected at X and E1 > E.
(ii) Negative terminal of E1 is connected at X.

V
3.21
no
3.22
I =
E
E
;
= 10I
R + nR R + R
n
1+ n
1+ n
= 10 =
n =n
1
n +1
1+
n
n = 10.
3.23
1
1
1
=
+ ....... +
,
R p R1
Rn
R min R min R min

R
=
+
+ ....... + min > 1
RP
R1
R2
Rn
121
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
and RS = R1 + ...... + Rn Rmax.

In Fig. (b), Rmin provides an equivalent route as in Fig. (a) for current.
But in addition there are (n 1) routes by the remaining (n 1) resistors.
Current in Fig.(b) > current in Fig. (a). Effective Resistance in
Fig. (b) < Rmin. Second circuit evidently affords a greater resistance. You
can use Fig. (c) and (d) and prove Rs > Rmax.
Rmin
Rmax
Rmax
Rmin
(a)
3.24
I =
(b)
I =
E+E
R + r1 + r2
V1 = E Ir1 = E
or E =
1=
2E
r1 = 0
r1 + r2 + R
2Er1
r1 + r2 + R
2r1
r1 + r2 + R
no
r1 + r2 + R = 2r1
R = r1 r2
3.26
RA =
RB =
l
(10 3 0.5)2
l
3 2
[(10 ) (0.5 10 3 )2 ]
R A (10 3 )2 (0.5 10 3 )2
=
=3:1
RB
(.5 10 3 )2
122
(d)
64
= 0.2 A
2+8
P.D. across E1 = 6 0.2 2 = 5.6 V

P.D. across E2 = VAB = 4 + 0.2 8 = 5.6 V
Point B is at a higher potential than A
3.25
(c)
E1
E2
Answers
3.27
Then current through R is I =
Veff
Reff + R
Dimensionally Veff = Veff (V1, V2, ...... Vn) has a dimension of voltage and
Reff = Reff (R1, R2, ....... Rm) has a dimension of resistance.
Therefore if all are increased n-fold
Veff
new
new
Veff
= nVeff , Reff
= n R eff
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Reff
and Rnew = nR.

Current thus remains the same.
3.28
Applying Kirchhoffs junction rule:

I1 = I + I2
Kirchhoffs loop rule gives:
10 = IR + 10I1....(i)
2 = 5I2 RI = 5 (I1 I) RI
4 = 10I1 10I 2RI..... (ii)
(i) (ii) 6 = 3RI + 10I or, 2 = I R +
10
2 = (R+ Reff)I Comparing with Veff = (R + Reff)I

and Veff = 2V
Reff =
10
.
3
2V
I1
5W
I2
10V
3.29
I2
10W
Veff
Reff
Power consumption = 2units/hour = 2KW = 2000J/s
P 2000
=
; 9A
V
220
Power loss in wire = RI2 J/s
I =
no
We can think of reducing entire network to a simple one for any

branch R as shown in Fig.
l 2
10
81 J/s
I = 1.7 108
106
A
4 J/s
= 0.2%
=
Power loss in Al wire = 4
Al
= 1.6 4 = 6.4J/s = 0.32%
Cu
123
3.30
Let R be the resistance of the potentiometer wire.
10 R
<8
50 + R
10R < 400 + 8R
2R < 400 or R < 200.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
10 R
> 8 2R > 80 R > 40
10 + R
3
R
4
< 8 7.5R < 80 + 8R
10 + R
10
R > 160 160 < R < 200.

Any R between 160 and 200 will achieve.
Potential drop across 400 cm of wire > 8V.
Potential drop across 300 cm of wire < 8V.
400 > 8V ( potential gradient)
300 < 8V
> 2V/m
2
< 2 V/m.
3
3.31
(a) I =
6
= 1 A = nevd A
6
vd =
10
29
1
1
=
10 4 m/s
19
6
1.6 10 10
1.6
1
m e vd2 nAl
2
1
1
= 9.1 10 31
10 8 1029 10 6 10 1 ; 2 10 17 J
2
2.56
K .E =
(b) Ohmic loss = RI2 = 6 12 = 6 J/s
All of KE of electrons would be lost in
no
Chapter
4.1
(d)
4.2
(a)
4.3
(a)
4.4
(d)
4.5
(a)
124
2 10 17
s ; 10 17 s
6
Answers
(d)
4.7
(a), (b)
4.8
(b), (d)
4.9
(b), (c)
4.10
(b), (c), (d)
4.11
(a), (b), (d)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4.6
4.12
For a charge particle moving perpendicular to the magnetic field:

mv 2
= qvB
R
qB v
= =
m
R
qB v
[ ] =
=
= [T ]1.
m R
4.13
dW=F.d l = 0
F.vdt = 0
F.v = 0
F must be velocity dependent which implies that angle between F and

v is 90. If v changes (direction) then (directions) F should also change
so that above condition is satisfied.
4.14
Magnetic force is frame dependent. Net acceleraton arising from this is

however frame independent (non - relativistic physics)for inertial frames.
4.15
Particle will accelerate and decelerate altenatively. So the radius of path

in the Dees will remain unchanged.
4.16
At O2, the magnetic field due to I1 is along the y-axis. The second wire is
along the y-axis and hence the force is zero.
4.17
B=
1 0 I
( i+j+k)
4
2R
eB
1
No dimensionless quantity [T ] = [ ] =
m
4.19
E = E 0 i, E0 > 0, B = B 0 k
4.20
Force due to d l2 on d l1 is zero.
no
4.18
Force due to d l1 on d l2 is non-zero.
125
iG (G + R1) = 2 for 2V range
4.21
R1 R2 R3
iG (G + R1+ R2) = 20 for 20V range

and iG (G + R1+ R2 + R3) = 200 for 200V range
Gives R1 = 1990
R2 = 18 k
and
R3 = 180 k
F = BIl Sin = BIl
4.22
2V 20V 200V
o I
2 h
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
B=
F = mg =
oI2l
2 h
oI l
4 10 250 25 1
=
2 mg
2 2.5 103 9.8
h =
= 51 104
h = 0.51 cm
When the field is off
4.23
=0
Mgl = Wcoil l
500 g l = Wcoil l
Wcoil = 500 9.8 N
When the magnetic field is switched on
Mgl + mgl = Wcoil l + IBL sin 90l
mgl = BIL l
m=
BIL 0.2 4.9 1 10 2

=
= 10 3 kg
g
9.8
=1g
F1 = i1lB =
d
V ldB
V0
F1 = 0
lB 1 =
2
2
2 2R
R
V
F2 = i 2lB = 0 lB
2R
Net torque = 1 2
1 V0 AB
4 2 R
no
4.25
126
i1
F1
d
V ldB
2 =
F2 = 0
2 2
4 2R
F1
45
4.24
F2
V0
Front view
As B is along the x axis, for a circular orbit the momenta of the two
particles are in the y - z plane. Let p1 and p2 be the momentum of the
electron and positron, respectively. Both of them define a circle of
radius R. They shall define circles of opposite sense. Let p1 make an
angle with the y axis p2 must make the same angle. The centres of
the repective circles must be perpendicular to the momenta and at a
distance R. Let the center of the electron be at Ce and of the positron
at Cp. The coordinates of Ce is
F2
Side view
Answers
The coordinates of Ce is
Ce (0, R sin , R cos )

The coordinates of Cp is
3
RR cos )
2
The circles of the two shall not overlap if the distance between the two
centers are greater than 2R.
Let d be the distance between Cp and Ce.
Cp (0, R sin ,
1.5 R
Cp
3
Then d 2 = (2RSin )2 + R 2R cos
2
Ce
y
92
= 4R 2 Sin2 +
R 6R 2 cos + 4R 2 cos2
4
= 4R 2 +
9 2
R 6R 2 cos
4
Since d has to be greater than 2R

d2 > 4R2
4R 2 +
9 2
R 6R 2 cos > 4 R 2
4
9
> 6 cos
4
Or, cos <
3
.
8
4.26
n=4
n=3
3 2
A = a2
a
4
CurrentI is same for all
Magnetic moment m = n I A
Area:
A=
m =Ia 2 3
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
4.27
3a2I
n=2
A=
3 3 2
a
4
3 3a 2I
(Note: m is in a geometric series)

(a) B (z) points in the same direction on z - axis and hence J (L) is a
monotonically increasing function of L.
(b) J(L) + Contribution from large distance on contour C = 0I
asL
Contribution from large distance 0(asB
1/r 3 )
J ( ) 0 I
127
(c) B z =
0 IR 2
2( z 2 + R 2 )3 / 2
B z dz =
0 IR 2
2(z 2 + R 2 )3 / 2 dz
Put z = Rtan
B z dz =
/2
/ 2 cos d = 0I
2
< B (z)circular coil
( L )square < ( L )circular coil
But by using arguments as in (b)
( )square = ( )circular
4.28
iG .G = (i1 iG) (S1+ S2+ S3)
for i1 = 10mA
iG (G + S1) = (i2 iG) (S2+ S3)

for i2 = 100mA
and iG (G + S1+S2) = (i3 iG) (S3)
for i3 = 1A
gives S1 = 1W, S2 = 0.1W and S3 = 0.01W
4.29
(a) zero
(b)
0 i
perpendicular to AO towards left.
2 R
(c)
0 i
perpendicular to AO towards left.
R
Chapter 5
(c)
5.2
(a)
5.3
(c)
5.4
(b)
5.5
(b)
5.6
(a), (d)
5.7
(a), (d)
5.8
(a), (d)
no
5.1
5.9
(a), (c), (d)
5.10
(b), (c), (d)
5.11
eh
eh
h

,h =
2m p and e 2m e
2
e >> p because mp >> me.

128
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(d) B(z)square
0I
dz = R sec2 d
Answers
5.12
Bl = 0 M l = 0 ( I + I M ) and H = 0 = I
Ml = IM = 106 0.1 = 105 A.
5.13
N
28g /22.4Lt
3.5
=
=
10 3 = 1.6 104.
Cu
8g /cc
22.4
x density . Now
xN
= 5 10 4 (from given data).
x Cu
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Hence major difference is accounted for by density.
5.14
Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons developing

magnetic moments opposite to applied field and hence is not much
affected by temperature.
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to alignments of atomic

magnetic moments in the direction of the applied field. As temperature
increases, this aligment is disturbed and hence susceptibilities of both
decrease as temperature increases.
5.15
(i) Away from the magnet.
(ii) Magnetic moment is from left to right
5.16
ds
3 m.r
B= 0
,m = mk
4 r 3
N
S
ds = r.r sin d d
0 ,0
5.17
5.18
0m 3 cos 2
B.ds = 4 r 3 r sin d d
= 0[due to integral] .
Net m = 0 . Only possibility is shown in Fig.

E (r) = c B (r), p =
m
. Mass and moment of inertia of dipoles are
c
equal.
no
5.19
5.20
I
mB
T = 2
I =
1 1
I and m = m .
2 4
2
T =
1
T
2
Consider a line of B through the bar magnet. It must be closed. Let C

be the amperian loop.
P
H.dl = 0 .dl > 0
H.dl = 0
PQP
129
C
H.dl < 0
p
P Q is inside the bar.

Hence H is making an obtuse angle with dl.
5.21
(i) Along z axis
0 2m
4 r 3
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
B=
B.d l =
R
0
dz
m
1
1
1
2m 3 = 0 2 2
4
2 2 R
a
a z
(ii) Along the quarter circle of radius R
B 0/ =
0 m. 0 m
=
( sin )
4 R 3
4 R 3
B.dl =
0m
sin d
4 R 2
ur uur
0m
B.dl = 4 R 2
a1
(iii) Along x-axis
B=
0 m
4 x 3
B.d l = 0
(iv) Along the quarter circle of radius a
0m
B.d l =
sin d ,
4 a 2
Add
5.22
0m 2
0m
B.d l = 4 a 2 sin d = 4 a 2
0
B.d l = 0
C
is dimensionless.
depends on magnetic moment induced when H is turned on. H

couples to atomic electrons through its charge e. The effect on m is via
no
current I which involves another factor of e. The combination " 0e 2 "
does not depend on the charge Q dimension.
= 0e 2m v R
0c 2 =
130
1 e
1 e2
Energy length
~ 2
.R ~
2
c 0
c 0R
c2
Answers
[ ] = M0L0T0Q0 =
ML3 T 2 L 0
M LQ
L2T 2
T
= 1, = 0, = 1
0 e 2
mR
10 6 10 38
~ 10 4 .
10 30 10 10
0 m
(4 cos 2 + sin2 )1 / 2
4 R 3
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
5.23
(i) B =
= 3 cos2 + 1 , minimum at = .
0
2
2
m
4 R 3
2
B is minimum at magnetic equator.
(ii)
tan (dip angle) =
at =
BV
= 2 cot
BH
dip angle vanishes. Magnetic equator is again the
locus.
(iii)
Dip angle is 45 when
BV
=1
BH
2 cot = 1
= tan12 is the locus.
5.24
Refer to the adjacent Fig.
1. P is in S (needle will point both north)
11.3
GE
Declination = 0
P is also on magnetic equator.

dip = 0
ME
2. Q is on magnetic equator.
no
dip = 0
5.25
but declination = 11.3.
n1 =
L
2 R
m 1 = n 1IA 1
n2 =
L
4a
m 2 = n 2 IA 2
131
L
2 R
I R
L
L
Ia 2 = Ia
4a
4
MR 2
(moment of inertia about an axis through the diameter)
2
I2 =
Ma 2
12
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
I1 =
12 =
m 1B
I1
22 =
m 2B
I2
m1 m 2
=
I1
I2
L
Ia
3
LR
I
4
=
a =
R.
2
2
.
2 MR
4
Ma
2
12
Chapter 6
(c)
6.2
(b)
6.3
(a)
6.4
(d)
6.5
(a)
6.6
(b)
6.7
(a), (b), (d)
6.8
(a), (b), (c)
6.9
(a), (d)
6.10
(b), (c)
no
6.1
6.11
No part of the wire is moving and so motional e.m.f. is zero. The

magnet is stationary and hence the magnetic field does not change
with time. This means no electromotive force is produced and hence
no current will flow in the circuit.
6.12
The current will increase. As the wires are pulled apart the flux will
leak through the gaps. Lenzs law demands that induced e.m.f. resist
this decrease, which can be done by an increase in current.
132
Answers
The current will decrease. As the iron core is inserted in the solenoid,
the magnetic field increases and the flux increases. Lents law implies
that induced e.m.f. should resist this increase, which can be achieved
by a decrease in current.
6.14
No flux was passing through the metal ring initially. When the
current is switched on, flux passes through the ring. According to
Lenzs law this increase will be resisted and this can happen if the
ring moves away from the solenoid. One can analyse this in more
detail (Fig 6.5). If the current in the solenoid is as shown, the flux
(downward) increases and this will cause a counterclockwise current
(as seen form the top in the ring). As the flow of current is in the
opposite direction to that in the solenoid, they will repel each other
and the ring will move upward.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
6.13
6.15
When the current in the solenoid decreases a current flows in

same direction in the metal ring as in the solenoid. Thus there
be a downward force. This means the ring will remain on
cardboard. The upward reaction of the cardboard on the ring
increase.
the
will
the
will
6.16
For the magnet, eddy currents are produced in the metallic pipe.
These currents will oppose the motion of the magnet. Therefore
magnets downward acceleration will be less than the acceleration
due to gravity g. On the other hand, an unmagnetised iron bar will
not produce eddy currents and will fall with an acceleration g. Thus
the magnet will take more time.
6.17
Flux through the ring
= Bo ( a 2 )cos t
(0,0,0)
= B( a 2 ) sin t
(a,0,0)
I = B( a 2 ) sin t / R
Current at
S2
t=
B ( a 2 )
along j
; I =
2
R
t =
; I =0
t =
B ( a 2 ) along .
3
j
; I =
2
R
S1
no
B D
6.18
One gets the same answer for flux. Flux can be throught of as the number
of magnetic field lines passing through the surface (we draw dN = B A
lines in an area A to B), As lines of of B cannot end or start in space
(they form closed loops) number of lines passing through surface S1 must
be the same as the number of lines passing through the surface S2.
6.19
Motional electric field E along the dotted line CD ( to both v and B and
along v B) = vB
BC
q
Q
133
E.M.F. along PQ = (length PQ)(Field along PQ)
=
d
vB cos = dvB .
cos
Therefore,
I =
Maximum rate of change of current is in AB. So maximum back emf

will be obtained between 5s < t <10s.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
6.20
dvB
and is independent of q.
R
dI
= 1/5
If u = L 1/5 for t = 3 s,
dt
(L is a constant)
3
3
= L = 3e
5
5
Thus at t = 7 s, u1 = 3 e.
For 10s < t < 30s
For 5s < t < 10s u1 = L
2
L
1
=
= e
20 10 2
For t > 30s
u2 = 0
u2 = L
6.21
Mutual inductance =
10 2
= 5mH
2
Flux = 5 10 3 1 = 5 10 3 Wb.
6.22
Let us assume that the parallel wires at are y = 0 and y = d. At t = 0, AB
has x=0 and moves with a velocity vi .

At time t, wire is at x (t) = vt.
Motional e.m.f. = ( Bo sin t ) vd ( j )
E.m.f due to change in field (along OBAC)
= Bo cos t x (t )d
Total e.m.f = Bod [ x cos (t ) + v sin (t )]

Along OBAC, Current (clockwise) =
Bo d
( x cos t + v sin t )
R
no
Force needed along i = Bo d ( x cos t + v sin t ) d Bo sin t

R
6.23
Bo 2d 2
( x cos t + v sin t ) sin t .
R
(i) Let the wire be at x = x (t) at time t.

Flux = B (t) l x (t)
E=
134
d
dB (t )
=
l x (t ) B (t ) l .v (t ) (second term due to motional emf)
dt
dt
Answers
I =
1
E
R
Force =
m
y
A
B
C
d 2x
l 2B dB
l 2 B 2 dx
=
x
(
)
t
dt 2
R dt
R dt
d 2 x l 2B 2 dx
+
=0
dt 2
mR dt
dB
= 0,
dt
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii)
l B (t ) dB
l x (t ) B (t ) l v (t ) i
R dt
dv l 2B 2
+
v =0
dt
mR
Y
x (t)
l 2B 2t
v = A exp
mR
At t = 0, v = u
v (t) = u exp (l2B2t/mR).
2
(iii) I R =
B 2l 2v 2 (t )
B 2l 2 2
R =
u exp(2l 2B 2t /mR )
2
R
R
t
Power lost = I 2R dt =
0
B 2l 2 2 mR
(l 2 B 2t/mR )
u
R
2l 2 B 2 1 e
m 2 m 2
u v (t )
2
2
= decrease in kinetic energy.
=
2l
6.24
Between time t = 0 and t =
0<t <
q
O l
2l
be x. The flux through the area ODQ is
1
2
no
1
2
= B QDOD= B l tan l
, the rod OP will make contact with the

4
side BD. Let the length OQ of the contact at some time t such that
1
= Bl 2 tan where = t
2
Thus the magnitude of the emf generated is =
The current is I =
q
C
d 1 2
= Bl sec 2t
dt 2
where R is the resistance of the rod in contact.
135
R = x =
I =
l
cos t
1 Bl 2
Bl
sec 2t cos t =
2 l
2 cos t
3
<t <
the rod is in contact with the side
4
For
2l
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
AB. Let the length of the rod in contact (OQ) be x. The
2 1 l2
flux through OQBD is = l +
2 tan
Thus
the
magnitude
of
emf
B where = t
generated
d 1 2 sec t
=
= Bl
dt 2
tan2 t
For
<t <
is
The current is I =
q
O
sin t 1 Bl
=
=
2 sin t
x
l
the rod will be in touch with OC. The Flux through
OQABD is = 2l 2
l2
2 tan t
Thus the magnitude of emf
I=
d Bl 2 sec 2 t
=
dt
2 tans t
1 Bl
=
R x 2 sin t
6.25
At a distance r from the wire,
dr
no
I
Field B (r ) = o (out of paper).
2 r
Total flux through the loop is
Flux =
136
o I x dr o I x
l
=
ln
2 x r
2 x o
o
xo
I (t)
Answers
1 dI
l
x
=
=I = o
ln
R dt R
2 R x 0
6.26
If I (t) is the current in the loop.
I (t ) =
L1
If Q is the charge that passed in time t,
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
L2 + x
I (t ) =
1 d
R dt
I (t)
dQ
dQ 1 d
=
or
dt
dt
R dt
Integrating
(t1 ) = L1
o
2
Q (t 1 ) Q ( t 2 ) =
L2 + x
1
(t1 ) (t 2 )
R
dx
I (t1 )
x
o L1
L +x
I (t1 ) ln 2
2
x
The magnitute of charge is
Q=
6.27
o L1 L 2 + x
ln
[ I o 0]
2
x
o L1I 1 L 2 + x
ln
.
2
x
2 bE = E.M .F =
the ring.
B. a 2
where E is the electric field generated around
t
no
B a 2
Torque = b Force = Q E b = Q
b
2b t
=Q
Ba 2
2 t
If L is the change in angular momentum

L = Torque t = Q
Ba 2
2
137
Initial angular momentum = 0
2
Final angular momentum = mb =
QBa 2
.
2mb 2
d 2x
B cos d dx
= mg sin
dt 2
R
dt
( Bd ) cos
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
6.28
QBa 2
2
dv
B 2d 2
(cos )2 v
= g sin
dt
mR
dv B 2d 2
(cos )2 v = g sin
+
dt
mR
v=
B 2d 2
+
A
exp
(cos2 )t (A is a constant to be
B 2d 2 cos2
mR
mR
g sin
determine by initial conditions)

=
6.29
mgR sin
1 exp
B 2d 2 cos2
B 2d 2
(cos2 )t
mR
If Q (t) is charge on the capacitor (note current flows from A to B)
I =
vBd
Q
R
RC
X
S
Q
dQ vBd
+
=
RC dt
R
B
B
Q = vBdC + Ae t / RC
Q = vBdC [1 e t / RC ]
no
(At time t = 0, Q = 0 = A = vBdc). Differentiating, we get
I =
6.30
vBd t / RC
e
R
dI
+ vBd = IR
dt
S
L
B
B
138
B
v d
B
Answers
dI
+ IR = vBd
dt
I =
vBd
+ A e Rt / 2
R
At
I = 0 A =
t=0
vBd
R
vBd
(1 e Rt / L ) .
R
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
I=
6.31
dz
d
= rate of change in flux = ( l2) Bo l
= IR.
dt
dt
I =
l 2 Bo
R
Energy lost/second = I2 R =
( l 2) 2 Bo 2v 2
R
This must come from rate of change in PE = m g
dz
= mgv
dt
(as kinetic energy is constant for v= constant)

Thus, mgv =
Or, v =
6.32
( l 2 B0 ) 2 v 2
R
mgR
.
( l 2 Bo )2
Magnetic field due to a solnoid S, B = 0nI
Magnetic flux in smaller coil = NBA where A = b 2

So e =
d d
=
(NBA )
dt
dt
no
= N b 2
d (B)
d
= N b 2
( 0n I)
dt
dt
= N b 2 0n
= Nn 0b 2
dI
dt
d
(mt 2 + C) = 0Nn b 2 2mt
dt
e = 0 Nn b 2 2mt
Negative sign signifies opposite nature of induced emf. The magnitude
of emf varies with time as shown in the Fig.
139
Chapter 7
(b)
7.2
(c)
7.3
(c)
7.4
(b)
7.5
(c)
7.6
(c)
7.7
(a)
7.8
(a), (d)
7.9
(c), (d)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
7.1
7.10
(a), (b), (d)
7.11
(a), (b), (c)
7.12
(c), (d)
7.13
(a), (d)
7.14
Magnetic energy analogous to kinetic energy and electrical energy

analogous to potential energy.
7.15
At high frequencies, capacitor short circuit (low reactance) and

inductor open circuit (high reactance). Therefore, the equivalent
circuit Z R1 + R 3 as shown in the Fig.
R1
R1
R2
R3
(a) Yes, if rms voltage in the two circuits are same then at resonance,
the rms current in LCR will be same as that in R circuit.
no
7.16
R3
(d) No, because R Z ,so I a I b .
7.17
Yes, No.
7.18
Bandwidth corresponds to frequencies at which I m =

0.7 I max .
140
1
I max
2
Answers
It is shown in the Fig.
= 1.2 0.8 = 0.4 rad/s
1.0
Im (A)
7.19
0.5
Dw
Irms = 1.6A (shown in Fig. by dotted line)

0
1.0 1.5 2.0

w(rad/s)
I (A)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3
2
1
.5
1
2
3
2T
7.20
From negative to zero to positive; zero at resonant frequency.
7.21
(a) A
(b) Zero
(c) L or C or LC
7.22
An a.c current changes direction with the source frequency and

the attractive force would average to zero. Thus, the a.c ampere
must be defined in terms of some property that is independent of
the direction of current. Joules heating effect is such property and
hence it is used to define rms value of a.c.
7.23
XL = L = 2pfL
= 3.14
Z = R 2 + L2
= (3.14)2 + (1)2 = 10.86
; 3.3
no
tan =
L
R
= 3.14
= tan 1(3.14)
; 72
;
72
rad.
180
Timelag t =
72
1
=
s
180 2 50 250
141
7.24
PL = 60W, IL = 0.54A
VL =
60
= 110V.
0.54
The transformer is step-down and have
1
I 2 = 0.27A.
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
ip =
1
input voltage. Hence
2
7.25
A capacitor does not allow flow of direct current through it as the

resistance across the gap is infinite. When an alternating voltage is
applied across the capacitor plates, the plates are alternately charged
and discharged. The current through the capacitor is a result of this
changing voltage (or charge). Thus, a capacitor will pass more current
through it if the voltage is changing at a faster rate, i.e. if the frequency
of supply is higher. This implies that the reactance offered by a capacitor
is less with increasing frequency; it is given by 1/C.
7.26
An inductor opposes flow of current through it by developing a back

emf according to Lenzs law. The induced voltage has a polarity so as
to maintain the current at its present value. If the current is decreasing,
the polarity of the induced emf will be so as to increase the current
and vice versa. Since the induced emf is proportional to the rate of
change of current, it will provide greater reactance to the flow of current
if the rate of change is faster, i.e. if the frequency is higher. The reactance
of an inductor, therefore, is proportional to the frequency, being given
by L.
7.27
Power P =
V2
50,000
= 25 = Z
Z
2000
Z2 = R2 + (XC XL)2 = 625
tan =
XC XL
3
=
R
4
no
25 2
3
625 = R 2 + R =
R
16
4
R2 = 400 R = 20
XC XL = 15
I =
IM
142
V 223
=
9 A.
Z
25
= 2 9=12.6 A.
Answers
If R, XC, XL are all doubled, tan does not change.
Z is doubled, current is halfed.
Power drawn is halfed.
7.28
(i) Resistance of Cu wires, R

l
1.710 8 20000
=
= 4
2
A
1
4
10
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
I at 220 V: VI = 106 W ; I =
106
= 0.45 104 A
220
RI2 = Power loss
= 4 (0.45)2 108 W
> 106 W
This method cannot be used for transmission

(ii) VI = 106 W = 11000 I
I =
1
102
1.1
RI2 =
1
4 104 =3.3104 W
1.21
4
Fraction of power loss = 3.3 10 =3.3%
6
10
7.29
Ri1 = vm sin t i1 =
vm sin t
R
q2
dq 2
+ L 22 = vm sin t
C
dt
no
Let q2 = qm sin (t + )
qm m L 2 sin( t + ) = vm sin t
C
qm =
vm
1
L 2
C
, = 0;
1
2 L > 0
C
143
vR =
i2 =
vm
1
Lw 2
C
, = L 2
1
>0
C
dq2
= qm cos(t + )
dt
1
2L > 0
C
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
i1 and i2 are out of phase. Let us assume
i1 + i 2 =
vm sin t
vm
+
cos t
1
R
L
c
Now A sin t + B cos t = C sin (t + )

C cos = A, C sin = B; C =
A2 + B2
v 2
2
vm 2
sin(t + )
Therefore, i1 + i 2 = m2 +
2
[l 1/ C ]
R
= tan 1
R
X L XC
1/ 2
1
1 1
+
=
Z R 2 ( L 1/ C )2
7.30
di
qi
di
d 1 2
+ Ri 2 +
= vi ; Li
=
Li = rate of change of energy stored
dt
c
dt dt 2
in an inductor.
Li
Ri2 = joule heating loss
no
q
d q2
i =
= rate of change of energy stored in the capacitor.
C
dt 2C
vi = rate at which driving force pours in energy. It goes into (i) ohmic
loss and (ii) increase of stored energy.
T
dt
0
144
d 1 2 q2
2
i +
+ Ri dt = vidt
dt 2
C 0
0
Answers
0 + ( +ve ) = vidt
0
vidt > 0
if phase difference, a constant is acute.
d 2q
dq q
+R
+ = vm sin t
2
dt
dt C
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
7.31
(i) L
Let q = qm sin ( t + ) = qm cos (t + )
i = imsin ( t + ) = qm sin (wt + )

im =
vm
=
Z
X XL
; = tan 1 C
R + (X C X L )
vm
vm
(ii) U L = 1 Li 2 = 1 L
sin2 (t 0 + )
2
2
2
2 R + X C X L ) 0
vm
1 q2
1
UC =
=
2
2C
2C R + ( X C X L )2
1
2
2 cos (t 0 + )

(iii) Left to itself, it is an LC oscillator. The capacitor will go on

discharging and all energy will go to L and back and forth.
Chapter 8
(c)
8.2
(b)
8.3
(b)
8.4
(d)
8.5
(d)
8.6
(c)
8.7
(c)
8.8
(a), (d)
8.9
(a), (b), (c)
8.10
(b), (d)
no
8.1
145
(a), (c), (d)
8.12
(b), (d)
8.13
(a), (c), (d)
8.14
As electromagnetic waves are plane polarised, so the receiving

antenna should be parallel to electric/magnetic part of the wave.
8.15
Frequency of the microwave matches the resonant frequency of water

molecules.
8.16
iC = i D =
8.17
On decreasing the frequency, reactance X c =
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
8.11
dq
= 2 q 0 sin 2 t .
dt
will increase which
will lead to decrease in conduction current. In this case iD = iC; hence

displacement current will decrease.
8.18
I av =
1 B02 1 3 108 (12 10 8 )2

c
=
= 1.71W /m 2 .
2 0 2
1.26 106
T=2p/w
8.19
S
BZ
Ey
8.20
EM waves exert radiation pressure. Tails of comets are due to solar

solar radiation.
8.21
B=
0 2I D
1
d E
= 0 = 0 0
4 r
4 r 2 r
dt
00 d
(E r 2 )
2r dt
no
8.22
(a)
0 0r dE
2
dt
Microwave,
3 X rays,
(b)
146
3 < 2 < 4 < 1
UV
4 Infrared
Answers
(c)
Microwave - Radar
UV - LASIK eye surgery
X-ray - Bone fracture identification (bone scanning)
Infrared - Optical communication.
T
8.23
Sav = c 2 0 E 0 B0
1
cos2 (kx t )dt as S = c 20 ( E B )
T 0
1 T
2
T
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= c 2 0E 0 B 0
E 1 as c = E 0
= c 2 0E 0 0
B 0
c 2
8.24
iD = C
1
0E 02c
2
E 02
as c =
2 0c
0 0
dV
dt
1 10 3 = 2 10 6
dV
dt
dV 1
= 103 = 5 10V / s
dt
2
Hence, applying a varying potential difference of 5 102 V/s would

produce a displacement current of desired value.
8.25
Pressure
no
P =
8.26
Force F 1 p
p
(F =
=
=
= rate of change of momentum)
Area
A A t
t
1 U
.
( pc = U = energy imparted by wave in timet )
A tc
I
U
intensity I =
c
A t
Intensity is reduced to one fourth. Tis is beacause the light beam

spreads, as it propogates into a spherical region of area 4 r2, but LASER
does not spread and hence its intensity remains constant.
147
8.27
Electric field of an EM wave is an oscillating field and so is the electric

force caused by it on a charged particle. This electric force averaged
over an integral number of cycles is zero since its direction changes
every half cycle. Hence, electric field is not responsible for radiation
pressure.
8.28
E=
e s
j
2 o a
o i
i
2 a
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
B=
o v
i
2 a
S=
( E B) =
2v
k
4 2 0a 2
8.29
1 js o v
j
i
o 2 oa
2 a
Let the distance between the plates be d. Then the electric field
Vo
sin(2 t ) . The conduction current density is given by the Ohms
d
law = E.
E=
Jc =
1 Vo
V0
sin (2 t )
sin (2 t ) =
d
d
= J co sin 2 t
where J 0c =
V0
The displacement current density is given as
=
dt
dt
no
Jd =
2 Vo
d
Vo
sin(2 t )
d
cos(2 t )
= Jdo cos(2 t ) , where Jd0 =
148
2 V 0
d
Answers
Jdo
J co
2 V o d
.
= 2 = 2 80 o 0.25 = 4 o 10
d
Vo
=
8.30
(i)
10
4
=
9
9 10
9
Displacement curing density can be found from the relation
dE
dt
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
be J D = 0
= 0 0 I0
s
cos (2 t). ln k
t
a
1
s
I 0 2 2 ( sin ( 2 t ) ) ln k
c2
a
2

a
= 2 I 0 sin ( 2 t ) ln k
c
s
(ii)
I 0 ln sin ( 2 t ) k
s
I d = J D sdsd
I 0 2
a
ln .sds sin ( 2 t )
s
s =0
1 2 a
2
=
I 0 ds l n .sin ( 2 t )
2

s
s =0
2
no
a 2 2
s
a
I 0 d ln .sin ( 2 t )
4
a
s
s =0
a
a 2 2
I 0 ln d .sin ( 2 t )
4
0
2
a 2
= +
I 0 sin 2 t ( The integral has value 1)
2
149
(iii)
The displacement current

2
a 2
d
Id = .
I 0 sin 2 t = I 0 sin 2 t
2
2
I 0d a
=
.
I0
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2
E.dl = E.dl + E.dl + E.dl + E.dl
(i)
8.31
h dl E
B.ds
E dl
1
z1
= E 0h [sin (kz 2 t ) sin (kz1 t )]

For evaluating
dl
= E.dl cos 90 + E.dl cos 0 + E.dl cos 90 + E.dl cos 180
(ii)
E=Ex
dl
2
z2 Z
(1)
B=B0 j
let us consider the rectangle
1234 to be made of strips of area ds = h dz each.
B .ds
Z2
= Bds cos 0 = Bds = B 0sin (kz t )hdz

Z1
Bo h
[cos(kz 2 t ) cos(kz1 t )]
k
E.dl =
(iii)
(2)
1 ds
z1
d B
dt
Using the relations obtained in Equations (1) and (2) and

simplifiying, we get
y
E 0h [sin (kz 2 t ) sin (kz1 t )] =
B=By j
B oh
[sin (kz 2 t ) sin (kz1 t )]
k
no
E 0 = B0
E0
=c
B0
(iv)
For evaluating
as shown in Fig.
150
B.dl , let us consider the loop 1234 in yz plane
h dl
dz
2
z2 z
Answers
B.dl = B.dl + B.dl + B.dl + B.dl
dl
2 B
dl
= B0h [sin (kz1 t ) sin (kz 2 t )]
dl
(3)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1
B=By j
= B dl cos 0 + B dl cos 90 + B dl cos 180 + B dl cos 90
E=Ex
dl
Now to evaluate E = E.ds , let us consider the rectangle 1234 to
be made of strips of area hdz each.
E = E.ds = Eds cos 0 = Eds =
Z2
E 0sin (kz1 t )hdz
Z1
E 0h
[cos(kz 2 t ) cos(kz1 t )]
k
d E
E h
= 0
[sin (kz1 t ) sin (kz 2 t )]
dt
k
(4)
In
E=Ex
1 z1
B=By j
ds
d E
I + 0
dt
, I = conduction current
= 0 in vacuum.
dz
z2
4 z
dl
B.dl = 0
0
d E
dt
Using relations obtained in Equations (3) and (4) and ssimplifying,

we get
B0 = E 0
no
B.dl = 0
. 0
0
E0
1
=
But E0/B0 = c, and = ck
B0 k 0
0
or c.c =
0
0
Therefore, c =
0 0
151
(a)
8.32
E - field contribution is uE =
B - field contribution is u B =
1
0E 2
2
+1
1 B2
2 0
1
1 B2
0E 2 +
2
2 0
2p
( 1)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Total energy density u = u E + u B =
The values of E2 and B2 vary from point to point and from moment to
moment. Hence, the effective values of E2 and B2 are their time averages.
(E 2 ) av= E 02 [sin 2 (kz t )]av
2
2
(B 2)av = (B 2)av = B 0 [sin (kz t )]av
The graph of sin2 and cos2 are identical in shape but shifted by /
2, so the average values of sin2 and Cos2 are also equal over any
integral multiple of .
and also sin2 + cos2 =1
So by symmetry the average of sin2 = average of cos2 =
(E 2 )av =
1
2
1 2
1
E 0 and ( B 2 )av = B02
2
2
Substuting in Equation (1),
u=
1
1 B02
0E 2 +
4
4
(b) We know
E0
= c and c =
B0
no
Therefore, u av =
9.1
(a)
9.2
(d)
9.3
(c)
152
(2)
0
0
1 B 02 E 02 / c 2
E2
1
=
= 0 0 = 0E 02 .
4 0
4 0
40 0
4
1
1
1
1
0E 02 + 0E 02 = 0E 02 ,and I av = u avc = 0E 02 .
4
4
2
2
Chapter 9
Answers
(b)
9.5
(c)
9.6
(c)
9.7
(b)
9.8
(b)
9.9
(b)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
9.4
9.10
(d)
9.11
(a)
9.12
(a), (b), (c)
9.13
(d)
9.14
(a), (d)
9.15
(a), (b)
9.16
(a), (b), (c)
9.17
As the refractive index for red is less than that for blue, parallel
beams of light incident on a lens will be bent more towards the axis
for blue light compared to red. Thus the focal length for blue light
will be smaller than that for red.
9.18
The near vision of an average person is 25cm. To view an object with

magnification 10,
m =
D 25
D
=
f =
= 2.5 = 0.025m
10
m
f
P =
1
= 40 diopters.
0.025
No. The reversibility of the lens makes equation.
9.20
Let the apparent depth be O1 for the object seen from
no
9.19
O1 =
2 then
2 h
1 3
If seen from 3 the apparent depth is O2.
O2 =
3 h
3 h + 2 h h 3 + 3
+ O1 =
2 3
2 3 1 3 3 2 1
Seen from outside, the apparent height is
153
O3 =
h h 3 3
+ +
1
3 3 2
h 1 1 1
+ +
3 1 2 3
h/3
m3
h/3
m2
h/3
m1
sin A
=
=
A
sin
2
cos
A
A
cos
2
2 = 2 cos A
A
2
sin
2
2 sin
A
A
3
or
= 30 A = 60
=
2
2
2
Let the two ends of the object be at distance u 1= u L/2 and

u2 = u + L/2, respectively, so that |u1u2|= L. Let the image of the two
ends be formed at v1 and v 2, so that the image length would be
1 1 1
fu
L = v1 v 2 . Since u + v = f or v = u f the image of the two ends will
be at v1 =
f (u L /2 )
f (u + L /2 )
, v2 =
u f L /2
u f + L /2
Hence
L =|v1 v 2 |=
f 2L
(u f )2 L2 / 4
no
Since the object is short and kept away from focus, we have
L2/4 << (u f )2
Hence finally
L =
154
O1
Given Dm = A
9.23
O2
At minimum deviation
( A + Dm )
sin
2
=
A
sin
2
9.22
O3
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
9.21
1
1 h
+O2 =
3 3
f2
(u f )2
L.
Refering to the Fig., AM is the direction of incidence ray before liquid

is filled. After liquid is filledm, BM is the direction of the incident ray.
Refracted ray in both cases is same as that along AM.
Answers
1
d
a
sin i =
a R
2
d + (a R )2
and sin = cos(90 ) =
-a
Substuting, we get d =
a +R
2
d + (a R )2
(a 2 R 2 )
(a + R )2 (a R )2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
90
sin i
sin i
=
sin r sin
9.24
50.0
0.5
If there was no cut then the object would have been at a height of
0.5 cm from the principal axis 00.
Consider the image for this case.
1 1 1
=
v u
f
1 1 1
1
1
1
= +
=
+
=
v u f
50 25 50
v = 50 cm.
v
50
= 1.
=
u
50
Thus the image would have been formed at 50 cm from the pole and
0.5 cm below the principal axis.
Hence with respect to the X axis passing through the edge of the cut
lens, the co-ordinates of the image are
(50 cm, 1 cm)
Magnification is m =
9.25
From the reversibility of u and v, as seen from the formula for lens,
no
1 1 1
=
f
v u
It is clear that there are two positions for which there shall be an image
on the screen.
Let the first position be when the lens is at O.
Given u + v = D
u = (D v)
Placing it in the lens formula
1
1 1
+ =
D v v
f
155
v + D v 1
=
(D v )v
f
v2 Dv + Df = 0
v =
D 2 4 Df
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
D
D 2 4Df
u = (D v) =
2
2
Thus,
D
if
the
D 2 4 Df
2
object
distance
is
then the image is at
D 2 4Df
D
+
2
2
If the object distance is

D
D
+
2
D 2 4 Df
, then the image is at
2
D 2 4Df
..
2
The distance between the poles for these two object distances is
D 2 4Df D
D

+
2
2
2
Let d =
If u =
D 2 4Df = D 2 4Df
D 2 4Df
D d
D d
+ then the image is at v =
.
2 2
2 2
The magnification m1 =
Dd
D +d
then v =
2
2
no
If u =
Dd
D +d
m2 D +d
D +d
=
The magnification m2 =
- Thus
.
m1 D d
Dd
9.26
Let d be the diameter of the disc. The spot shall be invisible if the
incident rays from the dot at O to the surface at
156
d
are at the critical angle.
2
Answers
Let i be the angle of incidence.
Then sin i =
Now,
d /2
= tan i
h
1
d
= h tan i = h 2 1
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2h
d =
9.27
2 1
(i) Let the power at the far point be Pf for the normal relaxed eye.
1
1
1
=
+
= 60 D
f
0.1 0.02
With the corrective lens the object distance at the far point is . The
power required is
Then Pf =
1
1
1
= +
= 50 D
f 0.02
The effective power of the relaxed eye with glasses is the sum of the eye
and that of the glasses Pg.
P f =
P f = Pf + Pg
Pg = 10 D.
(ii) His power of accomadation is 4 diopters for the normal eye. Let the
power of the normal eye for near vision be Pn.
Then 4 = Pn Pf or Pn = 64 D.
Let his near point be xn, then
1
1
1
+
= 64 or
+ 50 = 64
x n 0.02
xn
1
= 14,
xn
no
xn =
1
; 0.07m
14
(iii) With glasses Pn = P f + 4 = 54

54 =
1
1
1
+
=
+ 50
x n 0.02 x n
1
= 4,
x n
xn =
1
= 0.25m .
4
157
9.28
Any ray entering at an angle i shall be guided along AC if the angle

the ray makes with the face AC ( ) is greater than the critical angle.
sin
r
i
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
cos r
Or, 1 cos2r 1
i.e. sin2r 1
2
Since sin i = sin r
1
1
sin2i 1 2
2
Or, sin2i 2 1
The smallest angle shall be when i =
. If that is greater than the

2
critical angle then all other angles of incidence shall be more than the
critical angle.
Thus 1 2 1
Or, 2 2
9.29
Consider a portion of a ray between x and x + dx inside the liquid. Let

the angle of incidence at x be and let it enter the thin column at height
y. Because of the bending it shall emerge at x + dx with an angle + d
and at a height y + dy. From Snells law
(y) sin = (y+dy) sin (+d)
dy (sin cosd + cos sin d )

or (y) sin ; (y ) +
dy
no
; (y ) sin + (y )cos d +
or (y) cosd ;
d ;
y q
dy
q + dq
(y + dy)
d
dy sin
dy
1 d
dy tan
dy
But tan =
158
d
dy sin
dy
dx
(from the fig.)
dy
dx
Answers
d =
=
9.30
1 d
dx
dy
d
1 d
1 d
d
dx =
dy
dy o
Consider two planes at r and r + dr. Let the light be incident at an

angle at the plane at r and leave r + dr at an angle +d
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Then from Snells law
n(r) sin = n(r + dr) sin ( + d )
dn
dr (sin cos d + cos sin d )

n(r) sin ; n (r ) +
dr
dn
; n (r ) +
dr (sin + cos d )
dr
q + dq
Neglecting products of differentials
n (r )sin ; n (r )sin +
dr
R dn tan = n(r ) d
dr
dr
M
r + dr
dn
dr sin + n(r) cosd
dr
2GM
2GM d d
tan = 1 +
r 2c 2
dr
rc 2 dr
d =
0
2GM tan dr
c 2 r 2
Now r2 = x2 +R2 and tan =
R
x
2rdr = 2xdx
o
d =
no
2GM R
c 2 x
xdx
( x 2 + R 2 )2
Put x = R tan
dx = R Sec2 d
0 =
2GMR
c2
2 GM
Rc 2
/2
R sec2 d
R 3 sec3
/ 2
/2
/ 2
cos d =
4GM
R c2
159
9.31
As the material is of refractive index 1, r is negative and r positive.

Now i = r = r
The total deviation of the outcoming ray from the incoming ray is 4i.
Rays shall not reach the receiving plate if
4i
3
2
(angles measured clockwise from the y axis)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
3
8
Now sin i =
x
R
x 3
sin
8
R
8
Or,
Receiving plate
qr
qi
qr
qi
x 3
R
8
R
R 3
light emitted from the source shall not reach
x
8
8
the receiving plate.
Thus for
9.32 (i) The time required to travel from S to P1 is
u 2 + b2
u
1 b2
;
1+
assuming b << u0
c
c
2 u2
The time required to travel from P1 to O is
t1 =
SP1
=
c
P1O
v2 + b2
v
1 b2
=
;
1+
c
c
c
2 v2
The time required to travel through the lens is
t2 =
(n 1)w(b ) where n is the refractive index.

c
Thus the total time is
tl =
1
1 1 1
1 1 1
u + v + b 2 + + (n 1)w(b ) . Put
= +
c
2 u v
D u v
no
t=
1
1b
b
+ (n 1) w 0 +
u + v +
c
2 D

Fermets principle gives
Then t =
dt
b
2(n 1)b
=0=
db
CD
c
= 2(n 1)D
160
P1
Answers
Thus a convergent lens is formed if = 2(n 1)D . This is independant
of b and hence all paraxial rays from S will converge at O (i.e. for rays
b << n and b << v).
Since 1 = 1 + 1 , the focal length is D.
D u v
(ii) In this case
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1
1 b2
k
+ (n 1) k1ln 2
t = c u + v +
2 D
b
dt
b
k
=0=
(n 1) 1
db
D
b
2
b = (n 1) k1D
b=
(n 1)k1D
Thus all rays passing at a height b shall contribute to the image. The ray
paths make an angle
b
=
v
(n 1)k1D
(n 1)k1uv
(n 1)k1u
=
=
.
2
2
v
v (u + v )
(u + v )v
Chapter 10
(c)
10.2
(a)
10.3
(a)
10.4
(c)
10.5
(d)
10.6
(a), (b), (d)
10.7
(b), (d)
10.8
(a), (b)
10.9
(a), (b)
10.10
Yes.
no
10.1
10.11
Spherical.
10.12
Spherical with huge radius as compared to the earths radius so

that it is almost a plane.
10.13
Sound wave have frequencies 20 Hz to 20 kHz. The corresponding

wavelengths are 15m and 15mm, respectively. Diffraction effects
are seen if there are slits of width a such that.
: .
161
For light waves, wavelengths
show when
107m. Thus diffraction effects will
a : 10 7 m.
whereas for sound they will show for
15mm < a < 15m .
10.14
The linear distance between two dots is l =

a
distance
of
cm
this
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
At
2.54
cm ; 0.84 10 2 cm.
300
subtends an angle.
: l /z z =
0.84 102 cm
: 14.5 cm .
5.8 104
10.15
Only in the special cases when the pass axis of (III) is parollel to (I) or
(II) there shall be no light emerging. In all other cases there shall be
light emerging because the pass axis of (II) is no longer perpendicular
to the pass axis of (III).
10.16
Polarisation by reflection occurs when the angle of incidence is the

Brewsters angle i.e. tan B =
n2
n1
where n2 < n1.
When light travels in such a medium the critical angle is sin c =
n2
n1
where n2 < n1.
As |tan B|>|sin c|for large angles, B < C .

Thus, polarisation by reflection shall definitely occur.
10.17
d min =
1.22
2 sin
where is the angle subtended by the objective at the object.

o
For light of 5500 A
d min =
1.22 5.5 107

m
2 sin
no
For electrons accelerated through 100V the deBroglie wavelength

is
h 1.227
=
= 0.13nm = 0.13 10 9 m
p
100
d 'min =
162
1.22 1.3 1010

2 sin
Answers
d 'min =
1.22 1.3 1010

2 sin
d 'min 1.3 10 10
=
: 0.2 10 3
d min
5.5 10 7
10.18
T2P = D + x, T1 P = D x
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
S1P = (S1 T1 )2 + (PT1 )2
= [D 2 + (D x)2]1/2
S2P = [D 2 + (D + x)2]1/2
Minima will occur when
[D 2 + (D + x)2]1/2 [D2 + (D x)2]1/2 =
If x = D
(D2 + 4D2)1/2 =
(5D2)1/2 =
10.19
D =
2 5
Without P:
A = A + A11
A = A1 + A 2 = A 0sin(kx t )+A 0sin(kx t + )

(1)
(2)
A 11 = A 11
+ A 11
no
0
A 11 = A 11
[sin(kx wt ) + sin(kx t + ]
0
where A 0 , A 11
are the amplitudes of either of the beam in and
11 polarizations.
Intensity =
0
= A 0 + A 11
0
= A 0 + A11
}[sin
(kx wt ) (1+cos2 + 2 sin )+sin 2 (kx t ) sin2 ] average
} 12 .2(1+cos )
163
2
= 2 A 0 .(1 + cos )since A 0
average
0
= A 11
average
With P:
Assume A 2 is blocked:
2 2
Intensity = (A 111 + A11
) + ( A1 )2
1
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2
= A 0 (1 + cos ) + A 0 .
2
Given: I0 = 4 A 0 = Intensity without polariser at principal maxima.

Intensity at principal maxima with polariser
2
1
= A 0 2 +
2
5
I0
8
Intensity at first minima with polariser
= A
10.20
0 2
(1 1) +
A 0
I0
.
8
Path difference = 2d sin + ( 1)l

For principal maxima,
2d sin + 0.5l = 0
l
1
=
4d 16
no
sin 0 =
OP = D tan 0
Ql =
4
D
16
For the first minima:

2d sin1 +0.5l =
164
Answers
sin1 =
/2 0.5 l /2 /8
1 1
=
=
2d
2
4 16
+
On the positive side: sin =
3
16
5
16
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
On the negative side: sin =
The first principal maxima on the positive side is at distance

D tan + = D
sin +
1 sin
=D
16 32
above O.
In the ve side, the distance will be D tan =
10.21
16 52
below O.
(i) Consider the disturbances at R1 which is a distance d from A. Let

the wave at R1 because of A be YA = a cos t. The path difference of
the signal from A with that from B is /2 and hence the phase
difference is .
Thus the wave at R1 because of B is
y B = a cos(t ) = a cos t .
The path difference of the signal from C with that from A is and
hence the phase difference is 2.
R2
Thus the wave at R1 because of C is yc = a cos t.
The path difference between the signal from D with that of A is

2
l/2
A
l/2
1/ 2
l/2
no
R1
d 2 + (d /2 )
2
= d 1 +
4d 2
d +
1/ 2
2
= d 1 +
8d 2
d +
If d >> the path difference :
and hence the phase difference
is .
165
y D = a cos t .
Thus, the signal picked up at R1 is
yA + yB + yC + yD = 0
Let the signal picked up at R2 from B be yB = a1 cos t.
The path difference between signal at D and that at B is /2.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
y D = a1 cos t
The path difference between signal at A and that at B is

2
1/ 2
(d )2 + d = d 1 +
2
4d 2
The phase difference is
d :
1 2
8 d2
2 2
. 2 =
= : 0.
8 d
4d
Hence, yA = a1 cos ( t-)

Similarly, yC = a1 cos ( t-)
Signal picked up by R2 is
yA + yB + yC + yD = y = 2a1 cos ( t-)
| y |2 = 4a12 cos2 (t )
I = 2a12
Thus R1 picks up the larger signal.
(ii) If B is switched off,
R1 picks up y = a cos t
1 2
a
2
I R1 =
1 2
a1
2
Thus R1 and R2 pick up the same signal.
(c) If D is switched off.
no
I R2 =
1 2
a
2
R2 picks up y = 3a cos t
I R1 =
1
9a 2
2
Thus R2 picks up larger signal compared to R1.
(iv) Thus a signal at R1 indicates B has been switched off and an
enhanced signal at R2 indicates D has been switched off.
I R2 =
166
Answers
10.22
qi
Thus r r AE = BC r r CD
qi
B
A
air
C
D
qi
Fig.1
medium
or BC = r r (CD AE )
BC > 0, CD > AE
As showing that the postulate is reasonable. If however, the light
proceeded in the sense it does for ordinary material (viz. in the
fourth quadrant, Fig. 2)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
qr
(i) Suppose the postulate is true, then two parallel rays would
proceed as shown in Fig. 1. Assuming ED shows a wave front
then all points on this must have the same phase. All points
with the same optical path length must have the same phase.
Then r r AE = BC r r CD
Fig. 2
or, BC = r r (CD AE )
As AE > CD, BC < O
medium
showing that this is not possible. Hence the postalate is correct.
D
(ii) From Fig. 1.
BC = AC sin i and CD-AE = AC sin r:
air
Since r r ( AE CD ) = BC
n sin r = sin i.
10.23
Consider a ray incident at an angle i. A part of this ray is reflected

from the air-film interface and a part refracted inside. This is partly
reflected at the film-glass interface and a part transmitted. A part of
the reflected ray is reflected at the film-air interface and a part
transmitted as r2 parallel to r1. Of course succesive reflections and
transmissions will keep on decreasing the amplitude of the wave. Hence
rays r1 and r2 shall dominate the behavior. If incident light is to be
transmitted through the lens, r1 and r2 should interfere destructively.
Both the reflections at A and D are from lower to higher refractive
index and hence there is no phase change on reflection. The optical
path difference between r2 and r1 is
n (AD + CD) AB.
If d is the thickness of the film, then
AD = CD =
d
cos r
no
AB = AC sin i
AC
= d tan r
2
AC = 2d tan r
Hence, AB = 2d tanr sini
Thus the optical path difference is
167
2n
d
2d tan r sin i
cos r
r1
= 2.
sin i d
sin r
2d
sin i
sin r cos r
cos r
1 sin2 r
= 2d sin
sin r cos r
i
Air n =1
Film n = 1.38
= 2nd cosr
For these waves to interefere destructively this must be /2.
2nd cos r =
or nd cos r = /4
For a camera lens, the sources are in the vertical plane and hence
nd ;
o
5500 A
d =
; 1000 A
1.38 4
Chapter 11
(d)
11.2
(b)
11.3
(d)
11.4
(c)
11.5
(b)
11.6
(a)
11.7
(a)
11.8
(c)
11.9
(c), (d)
11.10
(a), (c)
11.11
(b), (c)
no
11.1
168
A r
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Glass n = 1.5
r2
Answers
11.12
(a), (b), (c)
11.13
(b), (d)
11.14
p / d = p x / p p =
11.15
(i) Emax = 2h
2m E
2m p E p
= 8 :1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii) The probability of absorbing 2 photons by the same electron is

very low. Hence such emissions will be negligible.
11.16
In the first case energy given out is less than the energy supplied. In
the second case, the material has to supply the energy as the emitted
photon has more energy. This cannot happen for stable substances.
11.17
No, most electrons get scattered into the metal. Only a few come out of
the surface of the metal.
11.18
Total E is constant
Let n1 and n2 be the number of photons of X-rays and visible region

n1E1 = n2E2
n1
hc
= n2
hc
n1
= 1.
n 2 2
n1
1
=
.
n 2 500
11.19
The momentum is transferred to the metal. At the microscopic level,

atoms absorb the photon and its momentum is transferred mainly
to the nucleus and electrons. The excited electron is emitted.
Conservation of momentum needs to be accounted for the
momentum transferred to the nucleus and electrons.
11.20
Maximum energy = h
no
1230
1 1230
600
2 400
11.21
1230
= 1.02eV.
1200
x p ; h
p ;
h
1.05 10 34 Js
;
= 1.05 10 25
x
10 9 m
169
E =
p2
(1.05 10 25 )2 1.052
1.052
19
eV
=
=
10
J=
2m 2 9.1 10 31
18.2
18.2 1.6
= 3.8 102eV
11.22
I = nAnA = nBB
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
nA
=2= B
A
nB
The frequency of beam B is twice that of A.

11.23
pc = p A + p B =
or c =
if pA, pB > 0 or pA, pB < 0
A B
A + B
If pA > 0, pB < 0 or pA < 0, pB > 0
pc = h
c =
11.24
B A h
=
A .B
c
B .A
.
A B
2d sin = = d =1010 m.
p=
E =
6.6 10 34
h
=
= 6.6 10 21 kg m / s
10
10
10 10
(6.6 10 24 )2
6.6 2
1.6 10 19 =
1.6 10 2 eV
27
2 (1.7 10 )
2 1.7
= 20.5 102eV = 0.21eV
11.25
6 1026 Na atoms weighs 23 kg.
Volume of target = (104 103 ) = 107m3

Density of sodium = (d) = 0.97 kg/m3
23
m 3 = 23.7 m3
0.97
Volume occupied of 1 Na atom =
23
m 3 = 3.95 1026 m3
0.97 6 1026
no
Volume of 6 1026 Na atoms =
No. of sodium atoms in the target =
10 7
= 2.53 1018
3.95 10 26
Number of photons/s in the beam for 104 m2 = n
170
Answers
Energy per s nh = 104 J 100 = 102 W
h (for = 660nm) =
1234.5
600
= 2.05eV = 2.05 1.6 1019 = 3.28 1019J.
10 2
= 3.05 1016 / s
3.28 10 19
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
n=
n=
1
1017 = 3.1 1016
3.2
If P is the probability of emission per atom, per photon, the number

of photoelectrons emitted/second
= P 3.1 1016 2.53 1018
Current = P 3.1 10+16 2.53 1018 1.6 1019 A

= P 1.25 10+16 A
This must equal 100A or
P=
100 10 6
1.25 10+16
P = 8 1021
Thus the probability of photemission by a single photon on a single

atom is very much less than 1. (That is why absorption of two
photons by an atom is negligible).
11.26
Work done by an external agency = +
4 0
1 q2
1 q2
dx
=
.
4 d x 2
4 4 0d
no
(1.6 10 19 ) 9 109
eV
With d = 0.1nm, energy =
4(1010 ) 1.6 1019
11.27
1.6 9
eV = 3.6 eV
4
(i) Stopping potential = 0 at a higher frequency for B. Hence it has

a higher work function.
(ii) Slope =
2
h
=
for A.
(10 5) 1014
e
2.5
for B.
(15 10) 1014
171
h=
1.6 10 19
2 10 14 = 6.04 10 34 Js for A
5
1.6 10 19 2.5 10 14
= 8 1034 Js for B.
5
Since h works out differently, experiment is not consistent with

the theory.
mAv = mAv1 + mBv2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.28
1
1
1
m Av 2 = m Av12 + m B v22
2
2
2
1/
1/
m A (v v1 )(v A + v1 ) = m Bv B2
2/
2/
v + v1 = v2
or v = v2 v1
m mB
v1 = A
v,
mA + mB
initial =
final =
h
m Av
h mA +mB)
1
m Av m A m B
dN
P
=
= 5 1019 / sec
dt
(hc / )
no
(i)
2m A
v2 =
v
mA + mB
h (m A + m B )
h
=
m Av m A (m A m B )v
11.29
and
(ii)
hc
(iii) P .
= 2.49eV > W0 : Yes.
r 2
t = W0 , t = 28.4s
4 d 2
dN
dt
(iv) N =
172
2
r
t = 2
2
4 d
d
r
Answers
Chapter 12
(c)
12.2
(c)
12.3
(a)
12.4
(a)
12.5
(a)
12.6
(a)
12.7
(a)
12.8
(a), (c)
12.9
(a), (b)
12.10
(a), (b)
12.11
(b), (d)
12.12
(b), (d)
12.13
(c), (d)
12.14
Einsteins mass-energy equivalence gives E = mc2. Thus the mass
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
12.1
of a H-atom is m p + m e
B
where B 13.6eV is the binding energy.
c2
12.15
Because both the nuclei are very heavy as compared to electron

mass.
12.16
Because electrons interact only electromagnetically.
12.17
Yes, since the Bohr formula involves only the product of the charges.
12.18
No, because accoding to Bohr model, En =
13.6
,
n2
no
and electons having different energies belong to different levels

having different values of n. So, their angular momenta will be
12.19
different, as mvr =
nh
.
2
me 4
is the
8 0n 2h 2
reduced mass. For H-atom m me. For positronium m m e / 2 .
The m that occurs in the Bohr formula En =
Hence for a positonium E1 6.8eV.
173
12.20
For a nucleus with charge 2e and electrons of charge e, the levels

are E n =
4me 4
. The ground state will have two electrons each
8 0 2n 2h 2
of energy E, and the total ground state energy would by (413.6)eV.

12.21
v = velocity of electron
Bohr radius.
Number of revolutions per unit time =
Current =
12.22
2 a 0
v
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
a0=
2 a 0
e.
v
1
1
2 ,
mn = cRZ 2
2
n
n
+
p
)
(
where m = n + p, (p = 1, 2, 3, ...) and R is Rydberg constant.

For p << n.
2
1
1
p
1
+
2
2
n
n
n
mn = cRZ 2
1 2p 1
n 2 n 3 n 2
mn = cRZ 2
mn = cRZ 2
2 p 2cRZ 2
;
p
n3
n3
Thus, mn are approximately in the order 1, 2, 3...........
12.23
H in Balmer series corresponds to transition n = 5 to n = 2. So the

electron in ground state n = 1 must first be put in state n = 5.
Energy required = E1 E5 = 13.6 0.54 = 13.06 eV.
no
If angular momentum is conserved, angular momentum of photon

=
change
in
angular
momentum
of
electron
= L 5 L 2 = 5h 2h = 3h = 3 1.06 10 34
= 3.18 1034 kg m2/s.
12.24
174
Reduced mass for H = H =
me
m
; m e 1 e
me
M
1+
M
Answers
m
m
m
Reduced mass for D = D ; m e 1 e = m e 1 e 1 + e

2M
2M
2M
h ij = ( E i E j ) . Thus, ij
If for Hydrogen/Deuterium the wavelength is H / D

1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
D H
1
m
=
; 1 + e ; 1
H D
2M
2 1840
D = H (0.99973)
Thus lines are 1217.7 , 1027.7 , 974.04 , 951.143 .
12.25
Taking into account the nuclear motion, the stationary state

energies shall be, E n =
Z 2e 4 1
. Let H be the reduced mass

8 02h 2 n 2
of Hydrogen and D that of Deutrium. Then the frequency of the

1st Lyman line in Hydrogen is h H =
4
H e 4
1 3 H e
. Thus
=
1
2 2
8 02h 2
4 4 8 0 h
the wavelength of the transition is H =
3 H e 4
. The wavelength
4 8 02h 3c
of the transition for the same line in Deutrium is D =
3 D e 4
.
4 8 02h 3c
= D H
Hence the percentage difference is
no
100
D H
H
100 = D
100
H
H
meMD
meMH
(m e + M D ) (m e + M H )
=
100
m e M H /(m e + M H )
m + M H
= e
m e + M D
MD
1 100
MH
Since me << MH < MD
175
M
M
100 = H D
M
M
H
H
D
1 + me / M H
1 + m / M 1 100
e
D
= (1 + m e / M H )(1 + m e / M D )1 1 100
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
m
m
; (1 + e e 1 100
M
M
H
D
1
1
me
100
MH MD
1
1
= 9.1 10 31
100
1.6725 10 27 3.3374 10 27
= 9.1 10 4 [0.5979 0.2996] 100
= 2.714 102 %
12.26
For a point nucleus in H-atom:

Ground state: mvr = h ,
mv 2
e2
1
= 2.
rB
rB 4 0
e2 1
h2
1
. = +
2
2 2
m rB rB
4 0 rB
h2 4 0
. 2 = rB = 0.51 A
m e
Potential energy
e2 1
mv 2 1
h2
h
= m. 2 2 =
= +13.6eV
. = 27.2eV ; K .E =
2
2 m rB 2mrB2
4 r0 rB
For an spherical nucleus of radius R,
no
If R < rB, same result.
If R >> r B: the electron moves inside the sphere with radius
rB ( rB = new Bohr radius).
r 3
Charge inside rB 4 = e B3
R
176
Answers
rB =
h 2 4 0 R 3
m e 2 rB 3
r B4 = (0.51 A).R 3.
R = 10 A
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= 510( A)4
rB (510)1/ 4 A < R.
K .E =
1
m
h
h
1
mv 2 = . 2 2 =
.
2
2 m rB
2m rB 2
h 2 rB2
(0.51)2
3.54
=
. 2 = (13.6eV)
=
= 0.16eV
2
1/ 2
(510)
22.6
2
mr
r
B B
e 2 rB 2 3R 2
P .E = +
.
4 0 2R
e 2 1 rB (rB 2 3R 2
= +
. .
R3
4 0 rB
0.51( 510 300)
= +(27.2eV)
1000
= +(27.2eV).
no
12.27
141
= 3.83eV.
1000
As the nucleus is massive, recoil momentum of the atom may be

neglected and the entire energy of the transition may be considered
transferred to the Auger electron. As there is a single valence electron
in Cr, the energy states may be thought of as given by the Bohr model.
2
The energy of the nth state E n = Z R
1
where R is the Rydberg
n2
constant and Z = 24.

The
energy
released
in
transition
from
to
1 3
is E = Z 2R 1 = Z 2R. The energy required to eject a n = 4

4 4
2
electron is E 4 = Z R
1
.
16
177
Thus the kinetic energy of the Auger electron is
1 2
3 1
K .E = Z 2R
Z R
=
4 16 16
=
11
24 24 13.6 eV
16
12.28
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= 5385.6 eV
mpc2 = 106 electron mass c2
10 6 0.5 MeV
10 6 0.5 1.6 10 13
0.8 10 19 J
h
hc
10 34 3 108
=
=
4 10 7 m >> Bohr radius.
2
m pc m pc
0.8 10 19
F =
e2
4 0
1
r 2 + r exp( r )
where 1 =
<<
h
4 10 7 m >> rB
m pc
1
i .e rB << 1
rB
U (r ) =
e 2 exp( r )
.
4 0
r
mvr = h v =
e2 1
mv 2
=
2 +
r
r
4 0 r
no
Also :
h
mr
178
e2 1
h2
=
2 +
3
mr
r
4 0 r
h2 e2
2
=
[r + r ]
m
4
Answers
If = 0;r = rB =
h 4 0
.
m e2
h2
e2
=
.rB
m 4 0
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Since 1 >> rB , put r = rB +
rB = rB + + (rB2 + 2 + 2 rB ); negect 2
or 0 = rB2 + (1 + 2 rB )
rB 2
rB 2 (1 2 rB ) = rB 2 since rB << 1
1 + 2 rB
V (r ) =
V (r ) =
e 2 exp( rB )
.
4 0
rB +
e 2 1
1 r .(1 rB )
4 0 rB
B
(27.2eV) remains unchanged.
K .E =
1
2
h2
1
h2
h2
mv 2 = m . 2 =
1
=
2
2
2
rB
2(rB + )
2 mr
2rB
= (13.6eV) [1 + 2rB ]
Total energy =
e2
4 0rB
h2
[1 + 2rB ]
2rB 2
no
= 27.2 + 13.6 [1 + 2rB ] eV
12.29
Change in energy = 13.6 2rB eV = 27.2rB eV

Let = 2 +
F =
q1q 2 R0
R
qq
. 2 + = 2 +0 , where 1 2 = , = (1.6 1019 )2 9 109
4 0 r
r
4 0
= 23.04 10 29
179
v2 =
mv 2
r
R 0
m r 1+
1/ 2
nh nh m
=
mv m R 0
mvr = n h , r =
r 1/ 2 + / 2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(i)
2 2 1
Solving this for r, we get rn = n h
m R0
For n = 1 and substituting the values of constant, we get

1
h2 1
r1 =
m R0
2.9
1.052 10 68
r1 =
= 8 10 11 = 0.08 nm
31
28
+19
9.1 10 2.3 10 10
(< 0.1 nm)
nh
h
m R 1
(ii) vn =
= n h 2 2 0 . For n = 1, v1 =
= 1.44 106 m/s
mrn
mr1
n h
(iii) K.E. =
1
mv12 = 9.43 10 19 J=5.9eV
2
P.E. till R 0 =
R0
P.E. from R0 to r = + R0
dr
r 2 +
R0
1
R0 1
1+
1+
R0
1 + r
R 0
1
1 + r 1+ R 0
no
P .E . =
180
R 0
1 1+
+
1+
1 + r
R0
R0
=+
R 0 1
1 r 1+ R0
Answers
P .E . =
R 01.9 1.9
0.9 r 0.9
R0
2.3
10 18[(0.8)0.9 1.9] J = 17.3 eV
0.9
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Total energy is (17.3 + 5.9) = 11.4 eV.
Chapter 13
13.1
(c)
13.2
(b)
13.3
(b)
13.4
(a)
13.5
(a)
13.6
(b)
13.7
(b)
13.8
(a), (b)
13.9
(b), (d)
13.10
(c), (d)
13.11
No, the binding energy of H13 is greater.
dN
dt
no
13.12
13.13
B has shorter mean life as is greater for B.
13.14
Excited electron because energy of electronic energy levels is in the

range of eV, only not in MeV. as -radiation has energy in MeV.
181
2 photons are produced which move in opposite directions to
conserve momentum.
13.16
Protons are positively charged and repel one another electrically.

This repulsion becomes so great in nuclei with more than 10 protons
or so, that an excess of neutrons which produce only attractive
forces, is required for stability.
No. of atoms
13.17
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
13.15
time
At t = 0, N A = N O while N B = 0. As time increases, N A falls off

exponentially, the number of atoms of B increases, becomes
maximum and finally decays to zero at (following exponential
decay law).
13.18
13.19
t=
ln
R0
R
5760 16
5760
4
ln
ln
=
0.693 12
0.693 3
5760
4
2.303 log =
0.693
3
2391.12 years.
To resolve two objects separated by distance d, the wavelength of

the proving signal must be less than d. Therefore, to detect separate
parts inside a nucleon, the electron must have a wavelength less
than 1015 m.
h
hc
and K pc K pc =
p
no
6.63 1034 3 108

eV
1.6 10 19 10 15
= 109 eV. = 1 GeV.
=
13.20
(a)
23
11
Na : Z1 = 11, N1 = 12
Mirror isobar of
182
23
11 Na
23
12 Mg
Answers
(b) Since Z2 > Z1, Mg has greater binding energy than Na.
13.21
38
38
2.48 h
At time t, Let
nuclei.
Cl
0.62 h
38
38
Ar
S have N1(t ) active nuclei and
38
Cl have N2(t) active
dN 1
= 1N 1 = rateof formation of Cl38. Also
dt
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
dN 2
= 1N 2 + 1N 1
dt
But N1 = N 0e 1t
dN 2
= 1N 0e 1t 2N 2
dt
Multiplying by e 2 t d t and rearranging
e 2t dN 2 + 2 N2e 2t dt =1N0e ( 2 1 )t dt
Integrating both sides.
N 2e
2t
N 01 ( 2 1 )t
e
+C
2 1
Since at t = 0, N2 = 0, C= N 01
2 1
N 2e 2t =
N2 =
N 0 1 ( 2 1 )t
(e
1)
2 1
N 0 1
(e ,t e 2t )
2 1
For maximum count,
On solving, t = ln
no
= ln
13.22
dN 2
=0
dt
1
/( 1 2)
2
2.48
/(2.48 0.62)
0.62
ln 4
2.303 log 4
=
1.86
1.86
= 0.745 s.
From conservation of energy
E B = Kn + K p =
2
pn 2 p p
+
2m 2m
(1)
183
From conservation of momentum
pn + p p =
E
c
(2)
If E = B, the first equation gives pn = pp = 0 and hence the second

equation cannot be satisfied, and the process cannot take place.
For the process to take place, Let E = B + , where would be <<B.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Then : substituting for pn from Equation (2) into Equation (1),
1
1
2
( p 2p + pn2 ) =
p 2 + ( p p E /c )
2m
2m p
2 p p2
2E
E2
p p + 2 2m = 0
c
c
E2
2E / c 4E 2 / c 2 8 2 2m
c
pp =
4
Since the determinant must be positive for pp to be real :
4E 2
E2
8 2 2m = 0
2
c
c
Or, 16m =
13.23
4E 2
E2
B2
.
2 , =
c
4mc 2 4mc 2
The binding energy in H atom E =
me 4
= 13.6 eV .
8 02h 2
(1)
no
If proton and neutron had charge e each and were governed by

the same electrostatic force, then in the above equation we would
need to replace electronic mass m by the reduced mass m of
proton-neutron and the electronic charge e by e .
m =
M 1836m
=
= 918m .
2
2
Binding energy =
Diving (2) by (1)
184
918m e
= 2.2MeV
8 02h 2
(given)
(2)
Answers
2.2MeV
e
918 =
13.6 eV
e
13.24
e
11 .
e
Before decay, neutron is at rest. Hence En = mnc2, pn = 0
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
After decay, from conservation of momentum:
pn = p p + p e
Or p p + pe = 0 p p = pe = p
1
Also, E p = (m p 2c 4 + p p 2c 2 )2 ,
1
E e = (m e 2c 4 + p e 2c 2 )2 = (m e 2c 4 + p p c 2 )2
From conservation of energy:

1
(m p 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 + (m e 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = m n c 2
m pc 2 936MeV,m n c 2 938MeV,m e c 2 = 0.51MeV
Since the energy difference between n and p is small, pc will be

small, pc << mpc2, while pc may be greater than mec2.
m pc 2 +
p 2c 2
; m n c 2 pc
2m p 2c 4
2
2
To first order pc ; m n c m pc = 938MeV 936MeV = 2MeV
This gives the momentum.
no
Then,
13.25
E p = (m p 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = 9362 + 22 ; 936MeV
1
E e = (m e 2c 4 + p 2c 2 )2 = (0.51)2 + 22 ; 2.06MeV
(i) t1/2 = 40 min (approx).
(ii) Slope of graph =
185
So =
So t1/ 2 =
13.26
4.16+3.11
= 1.05h
1
ln(R/R0)
0
t(h)
1.04
0.693
= 0.66h = 39.6 min or 40 min(approx ).
1.05
2.08
(i) SpSn = (M119,70 + MH M120,70)c2
3.11
4.16
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= (118.9058 + 1.0078252 119.902199)c2

= 0.0114362 c2
SpSb = (M120,70 + MH M121,70)c2
= (119.902199 + 1.0078252 120.903822)c2

= 0.0059912 c2
Since SpSn > SpSb, Sn nucleus is more stable than Sb nucleus.
(ii) It indicates shell structure of nucleus similar to the shell

structure of an atom. This also explains the peaks in BE/
nucleon curve.
Chapter 14
(d)
14.2
(b)
14.3
(b)
14.4
(d)
14.5
(b)
14.6
(c)
14.7
(b)
14.8
(c)
no
14.1
14.9
(a), (c)
14.10
(a), (c)
14.11
(b), (c), (d)
14.12
(b), (c)
14.13
(a), (b), (d)
186
Answers
(b), (d)
14.15
(a), (c), (d)
14.16
(a), (d)
14.17
The size of dopant atoms should be such as not to distort the pure
semiconductor lattice structure and yet easily contribute a charge
carrier on forming co-valent bonds with Si or Ge.
14.18
The energy gap for Sn is 0 eV, for C is 5.4 eV, for Si is 1.1 eV and for
Ge is 0.7eV, related to their atomic size.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
14.14
14.19
No, because the voltmeter must have a resistance very high

compared to the junction resistance, the latter being nearly infinite.
+1V
14.20
14.21
(i) 10 20 30 103 = 6V
(ii) If dc supply voltage is 5V, the output peak will not exceed Vcc = 5V.
Hence, V0 = 5V.
14.22
14.23
No, the extra power required for amplified output is obtained from the
DC source.
(i) ZENER junction diode and solar cell.
(ii) Zener breakdown voltage
(iii) Q- short circuit current

P- open circuit voltage.
14.24
Energy of incident light photon
no
hv =
14.25
6.6 10 34 3 108
= 2.06eV
6 10 7 1.6 10 19
For the incident radiation to be detected by the photodiode, energy

of incident radiation photon should be greater than the band gap.
This is true only for D2. Therefore, only D2 will detect this radiation.
V BB V BE If R is increased, I will decrease. Since I = I , it will
.
1
B
c
b
R1
result in decrease in I C i.e decrease in ammeter and voltmeter
readings.
IB =
187
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
14.26
OR gate gives output according to the truth table.
14.27
V0
Input
Output
Elemental semiconductors band-gap is such that emissions are in

IR region.
14.29
Truth table
no
14.28
AND Gate
188
Answers
14.30
I Z max =
RS =
14.31
P
= 0.2A = 200 mA
VZ
Vs V Z
2
=
= 10 .
I Z max
0.2
I3 is zero as the diode in that branch is reverse bised. Resistance in
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
the branch AB and EF are each (125 + 25) = 150 .

As AB and EF are identical parallel branches, their effective
resistance is
150
= 75
2
Net resistance in the circuit = (75 + 25) = 100 .

Current I1 =
5
= 0.05A .
100
As resistances of AB and EF are equal, and I1 = I2 + I3 + I4, I3 = 0
I2 = I4 =
14.32
0.05
= 0.025A
2
As Vbe = 0, potential drop across Rb is 10V.
Ib =
10
= 25 A
400 103
Since Vce = 0, potential drop across Rc, i.e. IcRc is 10V.
no
14.33
Ic =
10
= 3.33 10 3 = 3.33mA .
3 103
I c 3.33 103
=
= 1.33 102 = 133.
Ib
25 106
A
B
0
5 t (s)
C1
0
C2
0
189
14.34
From the output characteristics at point Q, VCE = 8V & IC = 4mA

VCC = ICRC + VCE
Rc =
VCC VCE
IC
Rc =
16 8
= 2K
4 10 3
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Since,
VBB = IBRB + VBE
RB =
16 0.7
= 510K
30 10 6
Now, =
IC
4 10 3
=
= 133
I B 30 106
Voltage gain = AV =
= 133
RC
RB
2 103
510 103
= 0.52
Power Gain = Ap = AV
= 2
RC
RB
= (133)2
14.35
2 103
= 69
510 103
When input voltage is greater than 5V, diode

is conducting
no
When input is less than 5V, diode is open

circuit
14.36
(i) In n region; number of e is due to As:
ne = ND = 1 106 5 1028 atoms/m3

ne = 5 1022/m3
The minority carriers (hole) is
190
Voltage
5V
Time
Answers
nh =
n i2 (1.5 1016 )2 2.25 1032

=
=
ne
5 1022
5 1022
nh = 0.45 10/m3
Similarly, when Boron is implanted a p type is created with holes
nh = NA = 200 106 5 1028
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
= 1 1025/m3
This is far greater than e that existed in n type wafer on which
Boron was diffused.
Therefore, minority carriers in created p region
ne =
n i2 2.25 1032
=
nh
1 1025
= 2.25 107/m3
(ii) Thus, when reverse biased 0.45 1010/m3, holes of n region

would contribute more to the reverse saturation current than 2.25
107/m3 minority e of p type region.
14.37
A
B
AB
A.B+A.B
B.A
14.38
no
1KW
14.39
IC IE IC (RC + RE) + VCE =12 V

RE = 9 RC = 1.2 K
191
VE = 1.2 V
VB = VE + VBE =1.7 V
I =
VB
= 0.085 mA
20K
RB =
IE = IC + IB
IC = IB
ICRC + VCE + IERE = VCC
(2)
RIB + VBE + IERE = VCC
(3)
From (3) Ie IC = IB
(R + RE)= VCC VBE, I B =
VCC V BE 11.5
=
mA
R + RE
200
From (2)
RC +R E =
2
VCC VCE VCC VCE
=
=
(12 3)K = 1.56K
IC
IB
11.5
RC = 1.56 1 = 0.56K
Chapter 15
(b)
15.2
(a)
15.3
(b)
15.4
(a)
15.5
(b)
15.6
(c)
15.7
(b)
15.8
(b)
no
15.1
15.9
(c)
15.10
(a), (b), (d)
15.11
(b), (d)
15.12
(b), (c), (d)
15.13
(a), (b), (c)
192
(1)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
14.40
121.7
10.3
=
= 108 K
I C / + 0.085 0.01 + 1.085
Answers
15.14
(b), (d)
15.15
(i)
analog
(ii)
analog
(iii)
digital
(iv)
digital
No, signals of frequency greater than 30 MHz will not be reflected

by the ionosphere, but will penetrate through the ionosphere.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
15.16
15.17
The refractive index increases with increase in frequency which

implies that for higher frequency waves, angle of refraction is less,
i.e. bending is less. Hence, the condition of total internal relection
is atained after travelling larger distance (by 3MHz wave).
15.18
Ac + Am = 15, Ac Am = 3
2Ac = 18, 2Am = 12

m =
15.19
1
= 1MHz
2 LC
LC =
15.20
Am 2
=
3
Ac
1
2 106
In AM, the carrier waves instantaneous voltage is varied by

modulating waves voltage. On transmission, noise signals can also
be added and receiver assumes noise a part of the modulating
signal.
However in FM, the carriers frequency is changed as per modulating
waves instantaneous voltage. This can only be done at the mixing/
modulating stage and not while signal is transmitting in channel.
Hence, noise doesnt effect FM signal.
no
15.21
Loss suffered in transmission path

= 2 dB km1 5 km = 10 dB
Total amplifier gain = 10 dB + 20 dB

= 30 dB
Overall gain of signal = 30 dB 10 dB
= 20 dB
193
P
10 log o
Pi
= 12 or Po = Pi 102
= 1.01 mW 100 = 101 mW.
15.22
(i) Range =
2 6.4 106 20 = 16 km
Area covered = 803.84 km2

2 6.4 106 20 + 2 6.4 106 25
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii) Range =
= (16 + 17.9) km = 33.9 km
Area covered = 3608.52 km2
Percentage increase in area

=
(3608.52 803.84)
100
803.84
= 348.9%
15.23
hT
dm
dm2 = 2(R + h T )2
8RhT = 2(R+hT)2
(Q dm = 2 2Rh T )
4Rh T = R + h T + 2Rh T
(R hT)2 = 0
R = hT
Since space wave frequency is used, << hT, hence only tower height
is taken to consideration.
In three diamensions, 6 antenna towers of hT = R would do.
15.24
For F1 layer
5
6
5 106 = 9(Nmax)1/2 or Nmax = 10 = 3.086 1011 m3
9
no
For F2 layer
8 106 = 9 (Nmax)1/2 or
8
11
3
6
Nmax = 10 = 7.9 10 m = 7.9 1011 m3.
9
15.25
194
Of c m, c and m+ m, only c + m or c m contains information.

Hence cost can be reduced by transmitting c + m, c m, both c + m
& c m
Answers
15.26 (i)
I
1
1
= , so ln = x
Io 4
4
ln 4
or ln4 = ax or x =

(ii)
10log10
I
= x where is the attunation in dB/km.
Io
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Here I = 1
Io 2
1
or 10log = 50 or log2 = 5
2
or =
15.27
log 2 0.3010
=
= 0.0602dB/ km
5
5
2x
= velocity
time
2x = 3 108 m/s 4.04 103s
x=
12.12 105
m = 6.06 105m = 606 km
2
d 2 = x 2 h s2 = (606)2 (600)2 = 7236; d = 85.06 km
Distance between source and receiver = 2d 170 km
hs
dm = 2 2Rh T , 2d = dm,
4d2 = 8 RhT
7236
d2
0.565 km = 565m.
= hT =
2 6400
2R
15.28
From the figure

Vmax =
100
20
= 50V, Vmin =
= 10 V.
2
2
no
(i) Percentage modulation
(%) =
Vmax V min
40
50 10
100 =
100 = 66.67%
100 =
V max + V min
50 + 10
60
(ii) Peak carrier voltage = Vc =
Vmax + Vmin
2
(iii) Peak information voltage = Vm = Vc =
50 + 10
= 30V
2
2
30 = 20V .
3
195
15.29
(a) v (t )= A(A m 1 sinm 1t + Am 2 sin m 2 t + Ac sin ct )
+ B( Am1 sin m 1t + Am2 sin m 2 t + Ac sin ct )2

=A (Am sinm t + Am 2 sin m 2 t + Ac sin ct )
1
+ B (( Am1 sin m1t + Am 2 t )2 + Ac2 sin2 ct
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
+2 Ac ( Am1 sin m 1t + Am 2 sin ct )
= A( A1 sin m1t + Am 2 sin m 2 t + Ac sin ct )
+ B [ Am 21 sin2 m 1t + Am 22 sin 2m 2 t + 2 Am1 Am 2 sin m1t sin m 2 t
+ Ac2 sin2 ct + 2 Ac ( Am1sin m1t sin ct + Am 2 sin m 2 + sin ct ]

= A( Am sin m t + Am sin m 2 t + A c sin ct )
1
+ B [ Am 12 sin 2 m t + Am 22 sin 2m 2 t + Ac2 sin 2 ct

1
2 Am 1 Am 2
2
2 Ac Am
2
2 Ac Am 1
2
[cos(m 2 m 1 )t cos(m 1 + m 2 )t ]
[cos(c m 1 )t cos(c + m 1 )t ]
[cos(c m 2 )t cos(c + m 2 )t ]
Frequencies present are
m1 , m 2 ,c
(m 2 m1 ),(m1 + m 2 )
(c m1 ),(c + m1 )
(c m2 ),(c + m 2 )
(i) Plot of amplitude versus is shown in the Figure.
m1 + m 2
no
m 2 m1
m1
m 2
c + m1
c m1
c m 2
c + m 2
(ii) As can be seen frequency spectrum is not symmetrical about

c. Crowding of spectrum is present for < c.
196
Answers
(iii) Adding more modulating signals lead to more crowding in < c
and more chances of mixing of signals.
(iv) Increase band-width and c to accommodate more signals. This
shows that large carrier frequency enables to carry more
information (more m) and which will in turn increase bandwidth.
fm = 1.5kHz, 1 = 0.7 10 3 s
fm
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
15.30
fc = 20MHz,
1
= 0.5 10 7 s
fc
(i) RC = 103 108 = 105 s

So,
1
1
<< RC <
is satisfied
fc
fm
So it can be demodulated.
(ii) RC = 104 108 = 104 s.

Here too
1
1
<< RC <
.
fc
fm
So this too can be demodulated
(iii) RC = 104 1012 = 108 s.
1
> RC , so this cannot be demodulated.
fc
no
Here
197
DESIGN OF QUESTION PAPER

PHYSICS
CLASS XII
Time: Three Hours
Max. Marks: 70
The weightage of the distribution of marks over different dimensions of the question paper
A.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
shall be as follows:
Weightage to content/subject units
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
Unit
Marks
Electrostatics
08
Current Electricity
07
Magnetic Effect of Current and Magnetism
08
Electromagnetic Induction and Alternating Current
08
03
Optics
14
Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter
04
Atoms and Nuclei
06
Semiconductor Electronics
07
05
Total
70
Weightage to form of questions
Sl. No.
Form of Questions
Marks for each
No. of Questions
Total Marks
Question
Long Answer (LA)
15
Short Answer SA (I)
09
27
Short Answer SA (II)
10
20
Very Short Answer (VSA)
08
08
Total
30
70
no
198
Sample Question Papers
1Mark quesiton may be Very Short Answer (VSA) type or Multiple Choice Quesition (MCQ)
with only one option correct.
C.
Scheme of options
1. There will be no overall option.
2. Internal choices (either or type) on a very selective basis has been given in some
questions.
Weightage to difficulty levels of questions
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
D.
Sl. No.
Estimated difficulty level
Percentage
1.
Easy
15
Average
70
Difficult
15
2.
no
3.
199
200
2 (2)
IX Semiconductor Electronics
X Systems Communication
8 (8)
1(1)
VIII Atoms and Nuclei
Total
1 (1)
V Electromagnetic Waves
VII Dual Nature of Radiation

and Matter
1(1)
IV Electromagnetic Induction
and Alternating Current
1 (1)
III Magnetic Effect of Current

and Magnetism
VI Optics
1 (1)
1(1)
20 (10)
2 (1)
2 (1)
2 (1)
4 (2)
2 (1)
2 (1)
2 (1)
4 (2)
SA II (2 marks)
27 (9)
3(1)
3 (1)
3 (1)
9 (3)
6 (2)
3 (1)
SA I (3 Marks)
15 (3)
5 (1)
5 (1)
5 (1)
LA (5 marks)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
VSA (1 mark)
II Current Electricity
I Electrostatics
Topic
no
CLASS XII
PHYSICS
BLUE - PRINT I
70 (30)
5 (2)
7 (4)
6 (3)
4 (2)
14 (4)
3 (2)
8 (3)
8 (3)
7 (3)
8 (4)
Total
SAMPLE PAPER I
XII - PHYSICS
Time : Three Hours
Max. Marks : 70
General Instructions
(c)
(d)
(e)
All questions are compulsory.

There are 30 questions in total. Questions 1 to 8 carry one mark each, questions 9 to 18
carry two marks each, questions 19 to 27 carry three marks each and questions 28 to 30
carry five marks each.
There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in all three
questions of five marks each. You have to attempt only one of the given choices in such
questions.
Use of calculators is not permitted.
You may use the following physical constants wherever necessary :
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
(b)
c = 3 108 m s-1
h = 6.6 10-34 J s
e = 1.6 10-19 C
o = 4 10-7 T m A-1
1
4 0
= 9 109
Am 2
C2
Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 1023 JK1
Avogadros number NA = 6.023 1023/mole

Mass of neutron mn = 1.6 1027 kg
Two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis, exert a net electric force in the + x
direction on a charge q1 fixed along the x axis as shown. If a positive charge Q is added at
(x, 0), the force on q1
y
q2
q2
no
1.
Q
q1
q3
q1
(x, 0)
q3
201
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Two batteries of emf 1 and 2 (2 > 1) and internal

resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected
in parallel as shown.
e1
r1
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
2.
shall increase along the positive x-axis.

shall decrease along the positive x-axis.
shall point along the negative x-axis.
shall increase but the direction changes because of the intersection of Q with q2 and q3.
(a) The equivalent emf eq of the two cells is between A

1 and 2, i.e. 1< eq < 2.
(b) The equivalent emf eq is smaller than 1 .
(c) The eq is given by eq = 1 + 2 always.
(d) eq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2.
e2
r2
3.
A proton has spin and magnetic moment just like an electron. Why then its effect is
neglected in magnetism of materials?
4.
If a LC circuit is considered analogous to a harmonically oscillating spring-block system,

which energy of the LC circuit would be analogous to potential energy and which one
analogous to kinetic energy?
5.
A variable frequency ac source is connected to a capacitor. How will the displacement

current change with decrease in frequency?
6.
In pair annihilation, an electron and a positron destroy each other to produce gamma
radiation. How is the momentum conserved?
7.
Can the potential barrier across a p-n junction be measured by simply connecting a
voltmeter across the junction?
8.
The conductivity of a semiconductor increases with increase in temperature because
number density of free current carriers increases.

relaxation time increases.
both number density of carriers and relaxation time increase.
number density of current carriers increases, relaxation time decreases but effect of
decrease in relaxation time is much less than increase in number density.
no
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
9.
Two charges q and 3q are placed fixed on x-axis separated by distance d. Where should
a third charge 2q be placed such that it will not experience any force?
10.
The battery remains connected to a parallel plate capacitor and a dielectric slab is inserted
between the plates. What will be effect on its (i) potential difference, (ii) capacity, (iii) electric
field, and (iv) energy stored?
202
Obtain an expression for the magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron in a Bohr
model.
12.
A wire in the form of a tightly wound solenoid is connected to a DC source, and carries a
current. If the coil is stretched so that there are gaps between successive elements of the
spiral coil, will the current increase or decrease? Explain.
13.
You are given a 2F parallel plate capacitor. How would you establish an instantaneous
displacement current of 1mA in the space between its plates?
14.
There are two sources of light, each emitting with a power of 100 W. One emits X-rays of
wavelength 1nm and the other visible light at 500 nm. Find the ratio of number of photons
of X-rays to the photons of visible light of the given wavelength?
15.
A particle is moving three times as fast as an electron. The ratio of the de Broglie wavelength
of the particle to that of the electron is 1.813 104. Calculate the particles mass and
indentify the particle.
16.
Consider two different hydrogen atoms. The electron in each atom is in an excited state.
Is it possible for the electrons to have different energies but the same orbital angular
momentum according to the Bohr model?
17.
What do the terms depletion region and barrier potential mean for a p-n junction?
18.
If the whole earth is to be connected by LOS communication using space waves (no
restriction of antenna size or tower height), what is the minimum number of antennas
required? Calculate the tower height of these antennas in terms of earths radius?
19.
Derive an expression (in vector form) for electric field of a dipole at a point on the equitorial
plane of the dipole. How does the field vary at large distances?
20.
What is relaxation time? Derive an expression for resistivity of a wire in terms of member
density of free electrons and relaxation time.
21.
First a set of n equal resistors of R each is connected in series to a battery of emf E and
internal resistance R. A current I is observed to flow. Then the n resistors are connected in
parallel to the same battery. It is observed that the current becomes
10 times. What is n?
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.
22.
An equiconvex lens (of refractive index 1.50) is placed in contact

with a liquid layer on top of a plane mirror as shown. A small needle
with its tip on the principal axis is moved along the axis until its
inverted image is found at the position of the needle. The distance
of the needle from the lens is measured to be 45.0 cm. The liquid is
removed and the experiment is repeated. The new distance is
measured to be 30.0 cm. What is the refractive index of the liquid?
203
23.
Obtain an expression for focal length of a combination of thin lenses in contact.
24.
Three immiscible liquids of densities d1 > d2 > d3 and refractive indices 1 > 2 > 3 are put
in a beaker. The height of each liquid column is
h
. A dot is made at the bottom of the
3
beaker. For near normal vision, find the apparent depth of the dot.
Define half -life and average-life of a radioactive substance. What is the relation between
the two?
26.
Using a suitable combination from a NOR, an OR and a NOT gate, draw circuits to obtain
the truth tables given below:
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
25.
(i)
(ii)
27.
Define the terms modulation index for an AM wave. What would be the modulation index
for an AM wave for which the maximum amplitude is a and the minimum amplitude is
b?
28.
(i) Derive an expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a current carrying
circular loop.
(ii) A coil of 100 turns (tighty bound) and radius 10 cm. carries a current of 1A. What is
the magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of the coil?
OR
no
State Amperes circuital law. Consider a long straight wire of a circular cross section
(radius a) carrying steady current I. The current I is uniformly distributed across this
cross section. Using Amperes circuital law, find the magnetic field in the region r < a and
r > a.
29.
An ac voltage v = vm sint is applied to a series LCR circuit. Obtain the expression for
current in the circuit and the phase angle between current and voltage. What is the
resonance frequency?
OR
An ac voltage v = vm sint is applied to a pure inductor L. Obtain an expression for the
current in the circuit. Prove that the average power supplied to an inductor over one
complete cycle is zero.
204

30. (i)
(ii)
State and explain Huygens Principle. Using it, obtain Snells law of refraction.
When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases. Does the
reduction in speed imply a reduction in the energy carried
by the light wave?
OR
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
With the help of a labelled ray diagram show the image formation by a compound
microscope. Derive an expression for its magnifying power. How can the magnifying
power be increased?
205
SAMPLE PAPER I
SOLUTIONS AND MARKING SCHEME
1.
(a)
(1)
2.
(a)
(1)
3.
eh
eh
h
and e
,h =
2m p
2m e
2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(1/2)
e >> p because mp >> me.
(1/2)
4.
Magnetic energy analogous to kinetic energy and electrical energy analogous to potential
energy.
(1/2), (1/2)
5.
On decreasing the frequency, reactance X c = 1 will increase which will lead to

C
decrease in conduction current. In this case iD = iC; hence displacement current will
decrease.
(1/2, 1/2)
6.
2 photons are produced which move in opposite directions to conserve momentum. (1)
7.
No, because the voltmeter must have a resistance very high compared to the junction
resistance, the latter being nearly infinite.
(1/2, 1/2)
8.
(d)
9.
At P: on 2q, Force due to q is to the left and that due to 3q is to the right.
(1)
2q 2
6q 2
4 x 2 = 4 (d + x )2
0
0
(1/2)
(d + x)2 = 3x2
2x2 2dx d2 = 0
x =
2q
3q
d
3d
2
2
(1/2)
no
(Negative sign would be between q and 3q and hence is unaceptable.)

x =
10.
d
3d d
+
= (1 + 3 ) to the left of q.
2
2
2
When battery remains connected,

(i)
potential difference V remains constant.
(ii) capacity C increases.
206
(1)
(1/2)
(1/2)
(1/2)
(iv) energy stored (1/2)CV2 increases as C increases.
(1/2)
I = e /T
(1/2)
T = 2 r / v
(1/2)
l = IA = I r 2 = evr /2
(1/2)
l =
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
11.
(iii) electric field will decrease.
e
l
2m e
(1/2)
12.
The current will increase. As the wires are pulled apart, the flux will leak through the gaps.
Lenzs law demands that induced e.m.f. resist this decrease, which can be done by an
increase in current.
(1,1)
13.
iD = C
dV
dt
(1/2)
1 10 3 = 2 10 6
dV
dt
dV 1
= 103 = 5 102 V/s
dt
2
(1/2)
Hence, applying a varying potential difference of 5 102 V/s would produce a displacement
current of the desired value.
(1)
14.
Total E is constant.
Let n1 and n2 be the number of photons of X-rays and light of visible region:
(1/2)
n1E1 = n2E2
(1/2)
n1
hc
= n2
hc
no
n1 1
=
.
n 2 2
n1
1
=
n 2 500
15.
(1/2)
(1/2)
de Broglie wavelength of a moving particle, having mass m and velocity v:
=h/p=h/mv
Mass, m=h/v
1/2)
For an electron, mass me = h/e ve
207
Now, we have v/ve = 3 and /e = 1.813 104
(1/2)
Then, mass of the particle, m= me (e/) (ve/v)
(1/2)
m = (9.11 10-31 kg) (1/3) (1/1.813 10-4)

m =1 1.675 10-27 kg.
Thus, the particle, with this mass could be a proton or a neutron.
No, because according to Bohr model, En =
13.6
,
n2
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
16.
(1/2)
(1)
and electons having different energies belong to different levels having different values
of n.
So, their angular momenta will be different, as mvr =
17.
18.
nh
.
2
(1)
Definition : depletion region
(1)
Definition : barrier potential
(1)
dm2 = 2(R + h T )2
(1/2)
8RhT = 2(R+hT)2 (Q dm = 2 2Rh T )
4Rh T = R 2 + h T 2 + 2Rh T
(R hT)2 = 0
R = hT
(1/2)
Since space wave frequency is used, << hT, hence only tower height is taken to
consideration. In three diamensions, 6 antenna towers of hT = R would do.
(1)
Derivation
(2)
At large distances, E 1/r3
(1)
20.
Definition and Derivation
(3)
21.
I = E/(R+nR)
(1)
10I = E/(R+R/n)
(1)
(1+n)/(1+1/n) = 10 = {(1+n)/(n+1)}n = n, n = 10.
(1)
no
19.
22.
208
= 1.5. 45cm is focal length of the combination of convex lens and plano convex liquid
lens. When liquid is removed, f 1= 30 cm is the focal length of convex lens only. If f2 is the
focal length of plano-convex liquid lens,
(1/2)
1
1 1
1
1
1
, f 2 = 90 cm
=
=
=
f2
f
f 1 45 30 90
(1/2)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
1
1
1
+
=
f1 f 2
f
Using lens makers formula, R1=R, R2=R
1
1
1
1
1
1
= ( 1)
= (1.5 1 ) + R = 30 cm
f2
R
R
30
R
R
2
1
(1/2,1/2)
For plano-convex lens
1
1
1
= ( 1)
f2
R1 R2
(1/2)
1
1 1
1
= ( 1)
=
90
30
30
= 1.33
(1/2)
1
1
1
=
+
+ ...
f
f1 f 2
23.
Derivation,
24.
Let the apparent depth be O1 for the object seen from 2 then
O1 =
(3)
2 h
1 3
(1)
If seen from 3, the apparent depth is O2
3 h
3 h + 2 h h 3 + 3
+ O1 =
2 3
2 3 1 3 3 2 1
no
O2 =
Seen from outside, the apparent height is

O3 =
1 h h 3 3
1 h
+O2 = 3 + 3 +
3 3
1
2
3
h1 1 1
+ +
3 1 2 3
h/3
m3
h/3
m2
h/3
m1
O3
(1)
O2
O1
O
(1)
209
25.
26.
Definition and expression: Half Life
(1/2,1/2)
Definition and expression: Average life
(1/2,1/2)
Relation between the two.
(1)
Output not symmetric for A, B = (0,1) and (1,0). NOT gate in one input.
(1)
(i) has three zero. NOR gate.

4mF
10W
(1)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Thus
2.5V
2W
(ii) has three ones. OR gate.

A
Thus
B
27.
= Am/Ac
(1)
(1)
a = Ac + Am
28.
b = Ac - Am
(1/2)
Ac = (a + b)/2, Am = (ab)/2
(1/2)
= (a - b)/(a+b)
(1)
(i) Derivation
(3)
(ii) Since the coil is tighty bound, we may take each circular element to have the same
radius R = 10cm = 0.1m. N=100. The magnitude of the magnetic field is
B = 0N I/(2 R) = 410-710-2 1/(2 101) = 210-4 = 6.28 104 T.
(2)
OR
(1)
Derivation of B = 0 I/2r, for r > a
(2)
Derivation of B = (0 I/2a2) r, for r < a
(2)
Derivation
(4)
no
29.
Statement of Amperes law
Resonance frequency
30.
210
(1)
OR
Derivation
(3)
Proof
(2)
(i)
(1)
Statement and explanation
Derivation of Snells law
(3)
(ii) No. Energy carried by a wave depends on the amplitude of the wave, not on the
speed of wave propagation.
(1)
OR
(iii) Labelled ray diagram
(1)
L
D
(2)
1 +
fo
fe
To Increase magnifying power, the objective and eyepice should have small focal
lengths. In practice, it is difficult ot make the focal length much smaller than 1 cm.
Also large lenses are required to make L large.
(1)
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Derivation m =
211
212
2 (1)
4 (2)
2 (1)
1 (1)
2 (2)
1 (1)
1 (1)
VI Optics
VII Dual Nature of Radiation

and Matter
IX Semiconductor Electronics
X Communication Systems
Total
VIII Atoms and Nuclei
20 (10)
2 (1)
1(1)
IV Electromagnetic Induction
and Alternating Current
8 (8)
3 (1)
4 (2)
1 (1)
27 (9)
3(1)
6 (2)
6 (2)
3 (1)
3 (1)
3 (1)
III Magnetic Effect of Current

and Magnetism
Current Electricity
II
15 (3)
5 (1)
5 (1)
5 (1)
4 (2)
Electrostatics
LA (5 marks)
SA I (3 Marks)
2 (1)
SA II (2 marks)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
VSA (1 mark)
1(1)
Topic
no
CLASS XII
PHYSICS
BLUE - PRINT II
70 (30)
5 (2)
7 (3)
6 (2)
4 (2)
14 (6)
3 (2)
8 (3)
8 (4)
7 (3)
8 (3)
Total
SAMPLE PAPER II
XII - PHYSICS
Time : Three Hours
Max. Marks : 70
General Instructions
All questions are compulsory.
(b)
There are 30 questions in total. Questions 1 to 8 carry one mark each, questions 9 to 18
carry two marks each, questions 19 to 27 carry three marks each and questions 28 to 30
carry five marks each.
(c)
There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in all three
questions of five marks each. You have to attempt only one of the given choices in such
questions.
(d)
Use of calculators is not permitted.
(e)
You may use the following physical constants wherever necessary :
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(a)
c = 3 108ms-1
h = 6.6 10-34Js
e = 1.6 10-19 C
o = 4 10-7 T m A-1
1
4 0
= 9 109
Am 2
C2
Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 1023 JK-1
Avogadros number NA = 6.023 1023/mole

Mass of neutron mn = 1.6 10-27 kg
A capacitor of 4 F is connected in a circuit as shown. The internal resistance of the

battery is 0.5 . The amount of charge on the capacitor plates will be
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
0
4C
16 C
8C
no
1.
4mF
10W
2.5V
2W
213
2.
Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a completely opposite sense in a
.
uniform magnetic field B = B0 k
(a) They have equal z-components of momenta.
(b) They must have equal charges.
(c) They necessarily represent a particle-antiparticle pair.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
e e
(d) The charge to mass ratio satisfy : m + m = 0 .
1
2
3.
A solenoid is connected to a battery so that a steady current flows through it. If an iron
core is inserted into the solenoid, will the current increase or decrease? Explain.
4.
Professor C.V Raman surprised his students by suspending freely a tiny light ball in a
transparent vacuum chamber by shining a laser beam on it. Which property of EM waves
was he exhibiting? Give one more example of this property.
5.
A passenger in an aeroplane shall

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
never see a rainbow.

may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric circles.
may see a primary and a secondary rainbow as concentric arcs.
shall never see a secondary rainbow.
6.
What is the shape of the wavefront on earth for sunlight?
7.
An electron (mass m ) with an initial velocity v = v 0 i (v 0 > 0) is in an electric field

E = E 0i(E 0 = constant > 0 ) . Its de Broglie wavelength at time t is given by
(a)
eE 0 t
1 + m v
0
no
eE 0t
(b) 0 1 + mv
0
(c) 0
(d) 0t.
8.
9.
Explain why elemental semiconductors cannot be used to make

visible LEDs.
Aq
Five charges, q each are placed at the corners of a regular pentagon
of side a as shown.
Dq
214
qC
(i) What will be the electric field at O if the charge from one of the corners (say A) is
removed?
(ii) What will be the electric field at O if the charge q at A is replaced by q ?
Two cells of emf E1 and E2 have internal resistance r1 and r2. Deduce an expression for
equivalent emf of their parallel combination.
11.
Draw a circut diagram of a potential divider using a cell and a rheostat. Also mark the
output terminals.
12.
If magnetic monopoles existed, how would the Gausss law of magnetism be modified?
13.
From molecular viewpoint, discuss the temperature dependence of susceptibility for

diamagnetism, paramagnetism and ferromagnetism.
14.
A lamp is connected in series with a capacitor. Predict your observations for dc and ac
connections. What happens in each case if the capacitance of the capacitor is reduced?
15.
A plane electromagnetic wave of frequency 25 MHz travels in free space along the
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
10.
x-direction. At a particular point in space and time. E = 6.3 $j V/m. What is B at this
point?
Define power of a lens. Show that it is inversaly proportional to the focal length of the lens.
17.
Two slits are made one millimetre apart and the screen is placed one metre away. What is
the fringe separation when blue-green light of wavelength 500 nm is used?
18.
A message signal of frequency 10 kHz and peak voltage of 10 volts is used to modulate a
carrier of frequency 1 MHz and peak voltage of 20 volts. Determine (a) modulation index,
and (b) the side bands produced.
19.
Draw a curcuit for determining internal resistance of a cell using a potentiometer. Explain
the principle on which this method is based.
20.
What do you mean by diamagnetism, paramagnetism and ferromagnetism?
21.
For the same objective, find the ratio of the least

separation between two points to be
o
distinguished by a microscope for light of 5000 A and electrons accelerated through 100V
used as the illuminating substance.
22.
Monochromatic light of frequency 6.0 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The power emitted
is 2.0 103 W. (i) What is the energy of a photon in the light beam? (ii) How many
photons per second, on an average, are emitted by the source?
no
16.
215
State Bohrs postulate for the permitted orbits for electrons in a hydrogen atom. How
this postulate was explained by de Broglie?
24.
Explain a beta decay process with an example. Tritium has a half life of 12.5y undergoing
beta decay. What fraction of a sample of pure tritium will remain undecayed after 25 y?
25.
What is rectification? With the help of a labelled circuit diagram, explain full wave
rectification using junction diode.
26.
Explain briefly, with the help of a circuit diagram, how V-I characteristics of a p-n junction
diode are obtained in (i) forward bias, and (ii) reverse bias. Draw the shapes of the curves
obtained.
27.
(i) Draw a block diagram of a communication system.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
23.
(ii) What is meant by detection of amplitude modulated wave? Describe briefly the
essential steps for detection.
28.
Derive an expression for potential due to a dipole for distances large compared to the size
of the dipole. How is the potential due to a dipole different from that due to a single
charge?
OR
Obtain an expression for potential energy of a system of two charges in an external field.
A system consisting of two chargs 7 C and 2 C are placed at (-9 cm, 0,0) and
(9 cm,0,0) respectively in an external electric field E = A (1/r2) where A = 9 105 C m2.
Calulate the potential energy of this system.
29.
Define self inductance of a coil. Obtain an expnession for self inductance of a long solenoid
of cross sectional area A, length l having n turns for unit length. Prove that self inductance
is the analogue of mass in mechanics.
OR
Define mutual inductance of to coil. On what factors it depends?
no
Two concentric circular coils, one of small radius r1 and the other of large radius r2, such
that r1 << r2, are placed co-axially with centres coinciding. Obtain the mutual inductance
of the arrangement.
30.
Draw a ray diagram to show two refraction of light through a glass prism. Explain with
help of a diagram the dependence of angle of deviation on the angle of incidence. Hence
obtain the relation for the angle of minimum deviation in terms of angle of prism and
refractive index of prism.
OR
216
(i)
Using the relation for refraction at a single spherical refracting surface, derive the lens
makers formula.
no
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(ii) Double convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of refraction index 1.55
with both faces of the same radius of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required
if the focal length is to be 20.0 cm?
217
SAMPLE PAPER II
SOLUTIONS AND MARKING SCHEME
01.
(a)
(1)
02.
(d)
03.
The current will decrease. As the iron core is inserted in the solenoid, the magnetic field
increases and the flux increases. Lents law implies that induced e.m.f. should resist this
increase, which can be achieved by a decrease in current.
(1)
04.
EM waves exert radiation pressure. Tails of comets are due to solar solar
radiation.
(1/2, 1/2)
05.
(b)
06.
Spherical with huge radius as compared to the earths radius so that it is almost
a plane.
(1/2, 1/2)
07.
(a)
08.
Elemental semiconductors band-gap is such that emissions are in infra-red

region.
(1/2, 1/2)
09.
(i)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
(1)
(1)
q
along OA
4 0 r 2
(ii)
10.
(1)
1 2q
along OA
4 0 r 2
I = I1 + I 2
=
(1)
(1)
(1/2)
E1 V E 2 V
+
r1
r2
E
1 1
E
I = 1 + 2 V +
r2
r1
r1 r2
r +r
E1r2 + E2r1
I 1 2
r1 + r2
r1 + r2
(1/2)
Comparing with V = Eeq Ireq
(1/2)
no
V =
We get, Eeq =
218
E1r2 + E 2r1
r1 + r2
(1/2)
11.
Figure shows the desired circuit. The output volage is obtained across. A and C.
(1,1)
A
R
12.
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
Gausss law of magnetism states that the flux of B through any closed surface is always
zero,
B.d s = 0
(1)
If monopole existed, the right hand side would be equal to monopole (magnetic
charge, qm ) multiplied by o.
B. d s = q
13.
(1)
Diamagnetism is due to orbital motion of electrons developing magnetic moments opposite

to applied field and hence is not much affected by temperature.
(1)
Paramagnetism and ferromagnetism is due to alignments of atomic magnetic moments in

the direction of the applied field. As temperature increases, this aligment is disturbed and
hence susceptibilities of both decrease as temperature increases.
(1)
14.
When a dc source is connected to a capacitor, the capacitor gets charged and after charging
no current flows in the circuit and the lamp will not glow. There will be no change even if C
is reduced.
(1)
With ac source, the capacitor offers capacitative reactance (1/C) and the current flows in
the circuit. Consquently, the lamp will shine. Reducing C will increase reactance and the
lamp will shine less brightly than before.
(1)
15.
The magnitude of B is
B=
6.3V / m
= 2.1 10 8 T
8
3 10 m / s
no
E
c
(1)
To find the direction, we note that E is along y-direction and the wave propagated along
x-axis. Therefore, B should be in a direction perpendicular to both x-, and y-axes. Using
vector algebra, E B should be along x-direction. Since, (+ $j ) (+ k )= $i , B is along the
z-direction.
Thus, B= 2.1
108 k T.
(1 )
219
16.
P = tan with diagram

=h/ f =
1
f
For small , tan . P = 1/f

Fringe spacing =
18.
19.
D
d
(1)
(1)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
17.
(1)
1 5 10 7
0.5mm
1 10 3
(1)
Modulation index = 10/20 = 0.5
(1)
Side bands are at 1010 kHz and 990 kHz.
(1)
Diagram
(1)
E = l1
V = l2
(1/2)
E/V = l1/l2
(1/2)
E = I (r+R), V= IR
20.
21.
E/V = (r+ R)/R
(1/2)
r = R {(l1/l2)-1}.
(1/2)
Diamgnetism
(1)
Paramagnetism
(1)
Ferromagnetism
(1)
d min =
1.22
2 sin
(1/2)
where is the angle subtended by the objective at the object.

o
no
For light of 5500 A

d min =
1.22 5.5 10 7
m
2 sin
For electrons accelerated through 100V, the deBroglie wavelength is
220
(1)
h 1.227
=
= 0.13nm = 0.13 10 9 m
p
100
d 'min =
1.22 1.3 10 10
2 sin
22.
(i)
(1/2)
(1/2)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
d min
= 0.2 10 3
'
d min
(1/2)
Each photon has an energy
E = hv = (6.63 1034 J s) (6.0 1014 Hz)

= 3.98 1019 J
(1)
(ii) If N is the number of photons emitted by the source per second, the power P transmitted
in the beam equals N times the energy per photon E, so that P = NE. Then
N =
=
23.
24.
25.
P
E
2.0 103 W = 5.0 1015 photons per second.

3.98 1019 J
(1)
Postutate
(1)
de Broglie explanation
(2)
Explanation
(1)
Example
(1)
Answer : 1/4 of sample
(1)
Rectification
(1/2)
Labelled diagram
(1/2)
no
Explanation
26.
(1)
(2)
Circuit diagram for obtaining characteristic curves
(1)
Explanation
(1)
221
27.
Shape of corves
(1)
(i)
(1)
Block diagram of communication system
(ii) Block diagram of a detector
(1)
Explanation
Derivation
(4)
Difference
(1)
tt
o N
be C
re ER
pu T
bl
is
he
d
28.
(1)
OR
29.
Derivation
(3)
Numerical
(2)
Definition
(1)
Derivation of expression
(2)
Proof
(2)
OR
30.
Definition of mutual inductance
(1)
Dependence on factors
(1)
Numerical
(3)
Labelled diagram
(1)
Diagram of versus e
(1)
Derivation m = (-1)A
(3)
OR
(i)
Derivation
(ii) = 1.55, R1 = R
(3)
(1/2)
R2 = R, f = 20 cm.
(1/2)
1
1
1 1.10
= (1.55 1)
+
=
20
R
R1 R2
(1/2)
R=201.1 = 22 cm.
(1/2)
no
1
1
1
= ( 1)
f
R1 R2
222

12th Physics Exemplar PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12th Physics Exemplar PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12th Physics Exemplar PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the document?

What is the purpose of the document?

What information is provided about copyright?

What information is provided about copyright?

CK

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system

National Council of Educational

OFFICES OF THE PUBLICATION

108, 100 Feet Road

Navjivan Trust Building

Printed on 80 GSM paper with NCERT

Published at the Publication Department

Assistant Production : Atul Saxena

The National Curriculum Framework (NCF)2005 initiated a new phase of

The position papers of the National Focus Groups on Teaching of Science,

National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) would welcome

Research and Training

H.S.Mani, Raja Ramanna Fellow, Institute of Mathematical Sciences, Chennai.

M.A.H.Ahsan, Lecturer, Department of Physics, Jamia Millia Islamia, New Delhi

Ravi Bhattacharjee, Reader, SGTB Khalsa College, University of Delhi, Delhi

R. Joshi, Lecturer (SG), Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

Shashi Prabha, Lecturer, Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

V.P.Srivastava, Reader, Department of Education in Science and Mathematics,

The National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCER T)

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM

MAGNETISM AND MATTER

RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS: MATERIALS, DEVICES

SAMPLE QUESTION PAPERS

In Fig.1.1, two positive charges q2 and q3 fixed along the y axis,

A point positive charge is brought near an isolated conducting

shall increase along the positive x-axis.

(a) Fig (i)

The Electric flux through the surface

in Fig.1.3 (iv) is the largest.

Electric Charges and Fields

The dipole will not experience any force.

A point charge +q, is placed at a distance d from an

(a) directed perpendicular to the plane and away from

A hemisphere is uniformely charged positively. The electric field at

Figure 1.5 shows electric field lines in which an electric dipole p is

Which of the following statements is correct?

perpendicular to the diameter

s E.dS = 0 over a surface, then

(a) the electric field inside the surface and on it is zero.

The Electric field at a point is

If there were only one type of charge in the universe, then

if the charge is outside the surface.

could not be defined.

if charges of magnitude q were inside the surface.

Consider a region inside which there are various types of charges

Refer to the arrangement of charges in Fig. 1.6 and a Gaussian

Electric Charges and Fields

(c) flux through the surface of sphere due to 5Q is zero.

A positive charge Q is uniformly distributed along a circular